Volume 4, Issue 9(1), September 2015
International Journal of Multidisciplinary Educational Research
Published by Sucharitha Publications 8-21-4,Saraswathi Nivas,Chinna Waltair Visakhapatnam – 530 017 Andhra Pradesh – India Email:
[email protected] Website: www.ijmer.in
Editorial Board Editor-in-Chief Dr.K. Victor Babu Faculty, Department of Philosophy Andhra University – Visakhapatnam - 530 003 Andhra Pradesh – India
EDITORIAL BOARD MEMBERS Prof. S.Mahendra Dev
Prof. Fidel Gutierrez Vivanco
Vice Chancellor Indira Gandhi Institute of Development Research Mumbai
Founder and President Escuela Virtual de Asesoría Filosófica Lima Peru
Prof.Y.C. Simhadri Vice Chancellor, Patna University Former Director Institute of Constitutional and Parliamentary Studies, New Delhi & Formerly Vice Chancellor of Benaras Hindu University, Andhra University Nagarjuna University, Patna University
Prof. (Dr.) Sohan Raj Tater Former Vice Chancellor Singhania University, Rajasthan
Prof.K.Sreerama Murty Department of Economics Andhra University - Visakhapatnam
Prof. K.R.Rajani Department of Philosophy Andhra University – Visakhapatnam
Prof. P.D.Satya Paul Department of Anthropology Andhra University – Visakhapatnam
Prof. Josef HÖCHTL Department of Political Economy University of Vienna, Vienna & Ex. Member of the Austrian Parliament Austria
Prof. Alexander Chumakov Chair of Philosophy Russian Philosophical Society Moscow, Russia
Prof. Igor Kondrashin The Member of The Russian Philosophical Society The Russian Humanist Society and Expert of The UNESCO, Moscow, Russia
Dr. Zoran Vujisiæ Rector St. Gregory Nazianzen Orthodox Institute Universidad Rural de Guatemala, GT, U.S.A
Prof.U.Shameem Department of Zoology Andhra University Visakhapatnam
Dr. N.V.S.Suryanarayana Dept. of Education, A.U. Campus Vizianagaram
Dr. Kameswara Sharma YVR Asst. Professor Dept. of Zoology Sri. Venkateswara College, Delhi University, Delhi
I Ketut Donder Depasar State Institute of Hindu Dharma Indonesia
Prof. Roger Wiemers Professor of Education Lipscomb University, Nashville, USA
Dr.B.S.N.Murthy Department of Mechanical Engineering GITAM University –Visakhapatnam
N.Suryanarayana (Dhanam)
Dr.Ton Quang Cuong
Department of Philosophy Andhra University Visakhapatnam
Dean of Faculty of Teacher Education University of Education, VNU, Hanoi
Prof. Chanakya Kumar Department of Computer Science
Dr.S.V Lakshmana Rao Coordinator A.P State Resource Center Visakhapatnam
University of Pune,Pune
Prof. Djordje Branko Vukelic Department for Production Engineering University of Novi Sad, Serbia
Dr.S.Kannan Department of History Annamalai University Annamalai Nagar, Chidambaram
Dr. Barada Prasad Bhol Registrar, Purushottam Institute of Engineering & Technology Sundargarh, Odisha
Dr.E. Ashok Kumar Department of Education North- Eastern Hill University, Shillong
Dr.K.Chaitanya
Prof.Shobha V Huilgol Department of Pharmacology Off- Al- Ameen Medical College, Bijapur
Prof.Joseph R.Jayakar Department of English GITAM University Hyderabad
Prof.Francesco Massoni Department of Public Health Sciences University of Sapienza, Rome
Department of Chemistry Nanjing University of Science and Technology People’s Republic of China
Prof.Mehsin Jabel Atteya
Dr.Merina Islam
Prof. Ronato Sabalza Ballado
Al-Mustansiriyah University College of Education Department of Mathematics, Iraq
Department of Philosophy Cachar College, Assam
Department of Mathematics University of Eastern Philippines, Philippines
Dr. Bipasha Sinha
Dr.Senthur Velmurugan .V Librarian Kalasalingam University Krishnankovil Tamilnadu
S. S. Jalan Girls’ College University of Calcutta, Calcutta Dr. K. John Babu Department of Journalism & Mass Comm Central University of Kashmir, Kashmir
Dr.J.B.Chakravarthi Assistant Professor Department of Sahitya Rasthritya Sanskrit Vidyapeetha, Tirupati
® © Editor-in-Chief, IJMER Typeset and Printed in India www.ijmer.in IJMER, Journal of Multidisciplinary Educational Research, concentrates on critical and creative research in multidisciplinary traditions. This journal seeks to promote original research and cultivate a fruitful dialogue between old and new thought.
CONTENTS Volume 4 S. No 1.
Issue 9(1)
September 2015
Factors Affecting Firm Value: Relationship between Social Responsibility and Corporate Governance to Firms Value on Public Manufacturing Industries (Theoretical Study) Moeljadi, Kusuma Ratnawati and I Ketut Suarthana
Page No 1
2.
Integrated Instructional Model / Conventional Teaching and Students’ Interest in Advanced Financial Accounting in Nigerian Universities: A Comparative Study Okoli B. E. and Nwosu B. 0.
24
3.
The Opportunities and Threats of Balinese Women Working on Cruise Ships I Made Darma Oka,Made Antara and I Gede Mudana
35
4.
A Bird’s Eye View on the Role of Eunuchs with Country Wise and Religion Wise K.Chandrasekhara Rao
46
5.
Millennium Development Goals and India’s Progress Jagadish.B
54
6.
African History N Kanakaratnam and Surya Raju Mattimalla
69
7.
Ancient Tribal and Naga Village - Some Reflections Akram Ali Bhutto
80
8.
An Impact of Micro Credit on Women Participating in Self Help Group M. Raja Rajeswari and S. Sethurajan
87
9.
Effect of Adjustment on the Academic Performance of Urdu Medium Male and Female Secondary Level Students Mohd. Moshahid
96
10.
Employee Development a most Important Factor in Employee Retention S.Tephillah Vasantham
107
11.
Comparative Study to Assess the Knowledge on Impact of Cigarette Smoking among Adolescent Boys at Selected Rural &Urban Schools S.Madhumozhi and Mahalaskhmi
110
12.
Map Formulation for Fire Hazard: A Case Study of Ahmedabad City Nilesh Jha and R. K. Gajjar
115
13.
Assess the Effectiveness of Breathing Exercise in Prevention of Respiratory Complications among the Patient who Undergone Major Surgery in Saveetha Medical College Hospital, Chennai Uma Maheswari.L, Aruna and Mangala Gowri
128
14.
Influence of Shape of Architectural Layouts on Seismic Performance of Buildings Sreehitha Buddha and S. Shiva Prasad
133
15.
Emotional Intelligence as a Tool to Manage Stress in Graduate Women Students Addala. Sree Padmavalli and G. Rajendra Prasad
148
16.
Acid Attack on Women: A Serious Issue With Special Reference to Indian Judiciary Anitha.K .N and B. S. Reddy
156
17.
Effect of Physical Exercises and Yogic Practices on Flexibility C. Kiran Chakravarthi
170
18.
Quality Teacher Education-Pros and Cons N. Sita Rama Krishna Rao
174
19.
An Over-View Analysis of Suicide – Its Use in India Reni Pal
192
20.
Racism and Dreadful Violence in Paul Scott’s The Jewel in the Crown S. Rajeswari and G.Chenna Reddy
203
Dr. K. VICTOR BABU M.A.,M.A.,M.Phil.,Ph.D.,PDF, (D.Lit) Faculty of Philosophy and Religious Studies & Editor-in-Chief International Journal of Multidisciplinary Educational Research (IJMER) & Sucharitha: A Journal of Philosophy and Religion Andhra University, Visakhapatnam Pin - 530 003 , Andhra Pradesh – India
ISSN : 2277 – 7881 Impact Factor :3.318(2015) Index Copernicus Value: 5.16
Editorial…… You will be happy to know that we have entered the fourth year of publication of IJMER, since its inception in April 2012. Focusing on many interdisciplinary subjects, the published papers are spreading the knowledge with fervent hope of upholding the holistic approach. With all my heart, I reiterate to echo my sincere feelings and express my profound thanks to each and every valued contributor. This journal continues to nurture and enhance the capabilities of one and all associated with it. We as a team with relentless efforts are committed to inspire the readers and achieve further progress. Aim is to sustain the tempo and improve. We acknowledge with pleasure that our readers are enjoying the publications of Sucharita Publishers. We solicit to receive ideas and comments for future improvements in its content and quality. Editor – in-Chief explicitly conveys his gratitude to all the Editorial Board members. Your support is our motivation. Best wishes to everyone.
Dr.K.Victor Babu Editor-in-Chief
SOCIAL SCIENCES, HUMANITIES, COMMERCE & MANAGEMENT, ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY, MEDICINE, SCIENCES, ART & DEVELOPMENT STUDIES, LAW
www.ijmer.in
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
FACTORS AFFECTING FIRM VALUE: RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE TO FIRMS VALUE ON PUBLIC MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES (THEORETICAL STUDY) Moeljadi University of Brawijaya Indonesia
Kusuma Ratnawati University of Brawijaya Indonesia
I Ketut Suarthana University of Udayana Bali, Indonesia BACKGROUND Monetary and Financial policies that issued on time can overcome Indonesian economy recession in a relatively short time. Stock markets started to revive. Since March 2009, Indonesia economy begins to grow that will provide opportunities to public companies that listed on Indonesia Stock Exchange, especially manufacturing companies, to create higher profits. As a result, stock price that reflecting company value tends to rise from the investors point of view. Investor assessment to stock price of manufacturing company that listed in Indonesia Stock Exchange tends to change. The change of company value perception was can not be from financial statements of a manufacturing company. A company that has a high social value, such as care for the social, economic, and environment, carry out activities of social responsibility, was expected to stimulate sales growth that accompanied by an increase in company value. Financial report was important information for investors to make investment decisions. One thing to know about company's financial condition was to analyze financial ratios (Higgins, 2006). Siallagan and Machfoedz (2006) states that financial ratios were useful to predict financial distreas, results of operations, financial condition now and future, as well as a guide for investors regarding the past and future performance. The public companies were required to include the relevant financial ratios in accordance with decision of Bapepam Chairman accoding No. Kep-51/PM/1996 dated January
www.ijmer.in
1
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
17, 1996 (JSE) in order to predict the firm value. Firms value itself was affect d by several variables; among them were profitability, corporate social responsibility, corporate governance and company size. Firms value was investor perception of company that often associated with stock prices. Company value was something very important in investment transactions. Data on Indonesian Stock Exchange show that book company value was addressed differently by investors. Price to Book Value (PBV) was not always equal to 1. This suggests that investors look company sometimes higher or lower than its book value. Furthermore, Siallagan and Machfoedz (2006) stated that low quality of earnings can create bad decision-making for investors and creditors that reducing company value. Firms value will be reflected in market price of its stock. Haruman (2008) revealed that increase in firms value can attract investors to invest. Interested investors would want a return (profitability) that higher. Weston and Copelan (1995) define profitability as company's ability to generate profit. Higher profitability can increase company’s stock price. Brigham in Sujoko (2007) revealed that based on Signaling Theory, high profitability shows company's prospects were good that investors will respond positively and will increase firm value. Higher dividend payments demonstrate the better prospects of company so that investors would be interested to buy stock and market company performance will increase. The Social Responsibility can be interpreted that company will voluntarily integrate social and environmental concerns into their business operations and interactions with stakeholders (Djalil, 2003). Broader understanding assumes that social responsibility becomes an integral part of investment strategy, core business strategy, management instruments, as well as company's operations. This concept considers that social responsibility was not a cost but an investment company (Kusumadilaga, 2010). Investors also want good corporate governance. This occurs due to dynamic competition. Company’s management should work rightly and not cheat to improve company's financial performance and firm value. Another perception of company value could not be separated from the investors view about company size itself. Large companies tend have lower financial difficulties and has good economic growth in future. Manufacturing companies
www.ijmer.in
2
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
that implement and report information about good social responsibility, good corporate governance, and large size were expected to give effect to increase in company's financial performance in review of profitability, thus achieving the purpose of company was to maximize shareholder value. The relationship between companies value and corporate social responsibility can also be analyzed from institutional and stakeholders theoretical literature. This theory develops the conceptualization of organization as a social system that was extensive and to shape behavior (Freeman, 1984; Donaldson and Preston, 1995). Companies can identify important actors in their environment, become an institution, or stakeholders such as employees, customers, and investors (Donaldson and Preston, 1995; Freeman, 1984). This theory also states that management-related stakeholders can effectively improve financial performance through creativity, development or maintenance of an important resource for company (Jones, 1995). Agency theory was also related to corporate social responsibility, in which the individual or group with business relationship authority (principal) will give authority to another individual or group (agent) to act within its authority and form of welfare for the principal (Jensen and Meckling, 1976). Stakeholder theory says that company was not the only entity that operates for its own sake, but should provide benefits to its stakeholders. Therefore, existence of a company was affect d by support from stakeholders (Donaldson and Preston, 1995). Corporate social responsibility activities of company were shown to have a long term positive effect that reflected in company profitability. Social care can provide benefits such company's products acceptance by public. It can increase sales growth. High sales will increase firms value (Balabanis, 1988; Brammer et al., 2005; Dahlian and Veronica, 2008; Kusumadilaga, 2010; Byus et al., 2010). A number of previous empirical literatures have tested the relationship between social responsibility and financial performance (McWilliams and Siegel, 2000; Waddock and Graves, 1997; Hillman and Keim, 2001; Orlitzky, Schmidt, and Rynes, 2003; Margolis and Walsh, 2003; Griffin and Mahon, 1997; McGuire, Sundgren, and Schneewiess, 1988). Some studies focus on relationship between social responsibility and profitability and company value
www.ijmer.in
3
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
(Orlitzky et al., 2003; Margolis and Walsh, 2003). Findings showed different results (Orlitzky et al., 2003; Griffin and Mahon, 1997; Margolis and Walsh, 2003). Orlitzky et al. (2003), states that social responsibility was a thing that can contribute to company value, which means company's resources were being used to enhance the interests of shareholders, while Griffin and Mahon (1997) and Margolis and Walsh (2003) revealed that corporate social responsibility was not contribute to financial firms value, since most investors were oriented towards short-term performance. Agency theory becomes framework for corporate governance that led to separation of ownership and manager of company. Jensen and Meckling (1976) identifies two ways to reduce adverse action of manager to damage investors, first was outside investors supervise company and second was to restrict manager's actions (bonding). Companies with good corporate governance structure can affect on financial company performance to make better corporate governance and higher ability to generate profits. Good governance can improve the internal control system to make company company's operations more efficient, effective, and economical (Jensen, 1993; Larcker et al., 2005; Jhunjhunwala and Mishra, 2009; Al-Rashed, 2010; Untung, 2010). However, different results show that good corporate governance can have a negative effect on company profitability (Bauer et al., 2004). Thohiri (2011) research gives the result that corporate governance does not significantly affect on level of company profitability. It contradictory needs further research. Gibrat law implies that growth process was random, average independent growth of companies was associated with company size and other company characteristics. Issue of whether company size has a systematic effect on growth rate becomes an interesting subject of investigation. Similarly, weather company size has a relationship with level of corporate profits (Iriji and Simon, 1974; Chesher, 1979; Amir Khalkhah and Mukhopadhyay, 1993; Almus and Nerlinger, 2000; Audresch et al., 2004). Generally, empirical test by Gibrat law did not provide clear evidence about relationship of company size and company's financial performance (Hart and Oulton, 1996; Caves, 1998; Del monte and Papagni, 2003; Coad, 2007).
www.ijmer.in
4
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Positive accounting theory (Watts and Zimerman, 1976) stated that large companies politically more sensitive than small firms. Company size has positive effect on profitability. It means that larger company has better operation to generate huge profits. (Ammer et al., 2003; Kaen, 2010). While Amato and Wilder (2001) and Hermawan (2010) shows that size does not affect on company's financial performance (profitability). This study was an extension of previous research to formulate new research propositions based on theories and previous research. The purpose of this study was to produce a new model that was more complete, thorough and wide-ranging (Ferdinand, 2006). THEORETICAL STUDY Agency Theory Agency conflicts occur due to differences in interests between owners and managers (Jensen and Meckling, 1976). On one hand, owners want the manager to work hard to maximize the owner utility. However, on other hand, managers also tend to strive to maximize their own utility. Agency theory implies the existence of information asymmetry between managers as agents and owners (in this case a shareholder) as principal. Jensen and Meckling (1976) states that if the two groups (the agent and principal) were the people who seek to maximize utility, then there was little reason to believe that agent will not always act in best interest of principal Agency theory seeks to answer the agency problem if the parties work together with different goals and division of labor. Specifically, agency theory discuss existence of agency relationship, where one particular party (the principal) delegates work to another party (the agent), which does the job. Agency theory was the underlying contractual relationship between principal and agent, so the focus of this theory was to determine most efficient contract that underlies the relationship between principal and agent. Agency theory was based on assumptions (Eisenhardt, 1989). These assumptions can be divided into 3 types, namely assumptions about human nature, organizational and information. Assumption of human nature emphasizes that humans have selfishness (self-interest), have limited rationality (bounded rationality), and do not like the risk (risk aversion). Organizational assumption was that there was a conflict between members of organization. Assumptions about the
www.ijmer.in
5
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
information in this case were that information as a commodity that can be traded. Jensen and Meckling (1976) showed the presence of three additional elements that can limit deviant behavior of agents. These elements were existence of managerial labor market, capital markets and market elements to support owner and dominate the ownership of company (market for corporate control). Agent or manager can’t have a prospect if the performance was bad, they will be dismissed by shareholders. Managerial labor market opportunities will remove managers who do not have good performance and behavior deviates from shareholders desire. Corporate governance was a concept that was based on agency theory to provide confidence to investors that they would receive a return on funds they have invested. Corporate governance was concerned with how the investors believe that managers will benefit them, confident that manager will not steal/embezzle or invest in projects that were not related to fund (capital) that have been invested by investors, and relates to how the investors control the manager (Shleifer and Vishny, 1997). In other words, corporate governance was expected to function to suppress or decrease agency cost. Stakeholder theory Concept of corporate social responsibility has been known since the early 1970s. Stakeholder theory was a collection policies and practices relating to stakeholders, values, compliance with legal requirements, respect the community and environment, as well as the commitment of business to contribute to sustainable development. Stakeholders basically have the ability to control or affect economic resources used by company. Therefore, power of stakeholders was determined by strength of stakeholders toward source (Ghozali and Chariri, 2007). These strength were ability to restrict the use of limited economic resources (capital and labor), access to influential media, ability to manage company, or the ability to affect the consumption of goods and services produced by company (Ghozali and Chariri, 2007). When stakeholders controlled economic resources important to company, then company will react in ways to satisfy desires of stakeholders. Therefore, stakeholder theory generally relate to how to manage their stakeholders.
www.ijmer.in
6
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Ullman (1985) explains stakeholder’s management depends on strategy adopted by company. There were two strategies that can be used, active or passive. Active strategy was when company tried to affect the organization's relationship with stakeholders that considered influential or important. Meanwhile, companies that adopt passive strategies tend not to constantly monitor the activities of stakeholders and deliberately did not seek the optimal strategy to attract the attention of stakeholders. Legitimacy theory Corporate Social Responsibility Disclosure or social responsibilities was one mechanism that can be used to communicate with stakeholders and company suggested that corporate social responsibility was a way in which some organizations can improve legitimacy. Dillard et al. (2004) stated that theoretical framework explain that organizations implement a voluntary reporting environment in relation to theory of legitimacy. Guthrie and Parker (1977) suggest that organizations disclose their environmental performance in a variety of components to get a positive reaction from the environment and getting legitimacy for companies. Legitimacy theory provides potential solutions based on economic studies. It found a "social contract" (Dierkes and Antal, 1985; Gray et al., 1995) and dimensions of contract that can potentially increase due to diversification of company's international activities. CSRD may also be seen as a tool to establish, maintain, and improve the legitimacy of company in where they issued opinion and public policy (Patten, 1991) and can reduce the political, social and economic exposure and pressure. Barkemeyer (2007) reveals legitimacy theory power of corporate social responsibility in developing world organization was two things. First, capability to put the profit maximization makes clearer picture about the motivation of companies to enlarge their social responsibilities. Second, legitimacy of organization can incorporate cultural factors that shape different institutional pressures in different contexts. So the theory of legitimacy was one of theories underlying Social Responsibility to perform (CSR) within company.
www.ijmer.in
7
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Positive Accounting Theory Accounting practices of a company was not necessarily the same with others. However, company has freedom to choose one of alternative procedures available to minimize costs and maximize the value of corporate contracts. Therefore, managers have a tendency to perform an action that positive accounting theory named as opportunistic actions (Scott, 1997). Watts and Zimmerman (1986) explains that large companies were more sensitive than small ones. This was due to large enterprises face greater political costs because it was a public entity that more highlighted. Company size shows a certain amount of resources which can be compared with other resources. Due to more intensive scrutiny, large companies were motivated to show higher profitability than smaller companies. Signaling Theory Signaling theory explains how signals success or failure of management (agent) was delivered to owner (principal) (Akerlof, 1970). This theory explains company’s incentive to voluntarily report information to capital markets even though there was no requirement of regulatory agencies. Company also shows information for internal purposes. Management reports the information by aims to maintain investor interest in company. Financial information was aimed to reduce information asymmetry between company and external parties (Wolk et al., 2001). Signaling theory emphasizes the information importance for investment decisions by outside company. Information was an essential element for investors and business people. Complete, relevant, accurate and timely information was required by investors in capital market as an analytical tool to make investment decisions. Company Value Siallagan and Machfoedz (2006) stated that company's main goal was to maximize company value. Low earnings quality will create bad decisionmaking by investors and creditors, so that company's market performance will decline. Pawestri (2006) states that company's market performance will be reflected in market stock price. Christiawan and Tarin (2004) stated some concept of value to describes firm value, among others: the nominal value, market value, intrinsic
www.ijmer.in
8
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
value, book value and liquidation value. Christiawan and Tarin (2004) concluded that most representative concepts to determine the market company performance was intrinsic value, but it was very difficult to estimate the intrinsic value, because of its determination requires the ability to identify significant variables that determine the profitability of a company. Those variables differ from one company to another. Therefore, market value was used by reason of ease of data was also based on an assessment of a moderate. Haruman (2008) stated that higher company's market performance can attract investors to invest. Investors interested return or profit to be derived from the investment in form of embedded capital gains and dividends, being a part of advantage given to shareholders. In this case the manager must decide whether the profits from company during the period will be distributed in whole or in part only distributed as a dividend and remainder being held companies or so-called retained earnings. Profitability Company profitability was company's ability to generate net income from the activity undertaken in an accounting period. Profitability can become an important consideration for investors in their investment decisions. With a bid to get the high profits, was expected to attract investors in investing. Many leaders use financial performance as basis for company's performance. Companies that can get huge profits can be said to be successful, or have a good financial performance. Profitability was the end result of a number policy and decision management (Brigham and Gapenski, 2006). Company profitability was a company's ability to generate net income from the activities carried out in an accounting period. Profitability was the ability of company to generate profits. Profit becomes basis of dividend distribution, whether cash dividends or stock dividends. Hermi (2004) revealed the profit was obtained from difference between the incoming treasures (revenue and profit) and outlay (expenses and losses). Profit of company can be held (retained earnings) and can be divided (as cash dividends). Higher net profit increases the return on investment in form of dividend income to investors.
www.ijmer.in
9
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Corporate Social Responsibility Achda (2007) defines corporate social responsibility (CSR) as company's commitment to responsible to their operation effect in social, economic and environmental life. Although income and employment has significance today but there were many factors that contribute to assessment of social performance to respects the cultural differences of employees, responding to environmental problems, providing high-quality products that safe to use. CSR definition in according to ISO 26000 was Responsibility of an Organization or the impact of its decisions and activities on society and the environment, through transparent and ethical behavior that contributes to sustainable development, health and the welfare of society, takes into account the expectations of stakeholders, is in compliance with applicable law and consistent with international norms of behavior and is integrated throughout the organization and practiced in its relationship. Corporate social responsibility expressed in Sustainability Reporting. Sustainability Reporting explain about economic policy, environmental and social and performance of organization and its products in context of sustainable development. Sustainability Reporting should become a strategic document which puts high level issues, challenges and opportunities Corporate Governance Corporate governance concept was first started by Barble and Mears in 1932. They make a book to analyze the separation of ownership and control. Separation implies the appearance of a conflict of interest between the shareholders with management in a dispersed ownership structure. Concept of corporate governance was also used in 1970s when there were several corporate scandals and several companies has political activities as well as the unhealthy culture of corruption. Corporate governance term began was discussed again by Cadbury Committee in its report in 1992, known as Cadbury Report cards. This report was seen as a turning point that determines corporate governance practices around the world (Tjager et al., 2003: 26). Cadbury Committee defines Corporate Governance as: “A set of rules that define the relationship between shareholder, managers, creditors, the government, employees and others
www.ijmer.in
10
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
internal
and
external
stakeholders
in
respect
to
their
rights
and
responsibilities”. Organizational for Economic Corporation and Development (Siswanto and Aldridge, 2005: 2) defines corporate governance as follows: “Corporate Governance is the system by which business corporations are directed and control. The corporate governance structure specifics the distribution of right and responsibilities among different participant in the corporation, such as the board, the managers, shareholders and other stakeholder, and spells out the rule and procedure for making decision on corporate affairs. By doing this, it also providers the structure through which the company objectives are set and the means of attaining those objectives and monitoring performance”. Australian Stock Exchange (ASE) defines corporate governance “the system by which companies are direct and managed. It influences how company can set and achieve the objectives, how risk is monitored and assessed, and an how performance is optimized” Concept of good corporate governance was a new phenomenon in Indonesia, in post-crisis corporate governance since 1997. This was introduced by Government of Indonesia and International Monetary Fund (IMF) in context of post-crisis economic recovery. Then the concept of corporate governance becomes a reference for companies in Indonesia. Company Size Company size can be defined as effort to Asses Company based on assets, number of sales, average total sales and average total assets. Generally, Indonesia researchers use total assets or total sales as a proxy of company size. Company size will be very important for investors and creditors because it will be associated with risk of investment made. Rachmawati and Triatmoko (2007) mentions that large company’s total assets shows the company has a good or positive cash flow, so it was considered to have good prospects in long term. It also reflects that company was relatively more stable and better generate profits than firms with small total assets. Company's policy will have implications on cash flow outlook for the future. It affect on tax that received by Regulator (government) and
www.ijmer.in
11
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
effectiveness to provide protection to general public. Company size will affect corporate debt policy. Bigger company needs more money to run company's operations. One source was debt. Brigham (1999) states that companies with high growth rates tend to require large fund from external sources. Increased debt would increase company's market performance. Company value Company value can be seed from several approaches. Balance sheet approaches see company value as value of its assets. This simple method sees company value in balance sheet. Method to measured company’s value was based on income statement. Company value can be determined by sales, earnings or other indicators. Another approach was goodwill. Company value was calculated from book value plus goodwill. Company value was a function of future cash flows and level of return. Brigham (1999) defines company value as the value given to management of financial markets and corporate organizations as a company continues to grow. This value was determined by market perceptions of companies performance sustainability that represented by market value of shares outstanding. Some researchers use different measurement as proxy for company value. Most of them use Tobin's Q as a proxy for company value (Yermack, 1996; Siallagan, 2006). Tobin's Q was defined as the ratio of book value of debt plus the market value of equity divided by book value of equity. Brigham (1999), and Wahyudi and Prawesti (2006) use a proxy ratio of market value to book value. This ratio was defined as the market value of equity divided by book value of equity. RESEARCH PROPOSITION Effect of Social Responcibility on Profitability Corporate social responsibility disclosure or social responsibilities was one mechanism to communicate with stakeholders and company suggested that corporate social responsibility allegedly become gate to earn profits and legitimacy. Guthrie and Parker (1977) suggests that organization was always constantly express their social responsibility in order to get a broad positive reaction from the environment and getting legitimacy for company's business. Legitimacy theory provides potential solutions based on studies in economic
www.ijmer.in
12
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
studies. Social contract and contract dimensions could potentially increase due to diversification of company's international activities (Dierkes and Antal, 1985; Gray, et al., 1995b). Company's concern to environment can have a positive effect for general public and particular to company to increase product acceptance and company image, so company's financial performance will be increased. Good financial performance was shown by high company profitability. Profitability can be considered a tool to make an investment decision for investors; greater dividend payout will save the cost of capital. On other side, managers (insider) can be increase power even and its stake due to receipt of dividends as a result of high profit. High profits were expected to attract investors to invest. Therefore, it can be formulated proposition 1 below. Proposition 1: Good corporate social responsibility disclosure can increase company profitability. Effect of Corporate Governance on Profitability Corporate governance was based on agency theory to provide confidence to investors that they would receive a return on funds they have invested. Corporate governance was concerned with how the investors believe that managers will benefit them, confident that manager will not steal / embezzle or invest in projects that were not related to fund / capital which has been invested by investors, and relates to how investors control the manager (Shleifer and Vishny, 1997). Good Corporate Governance can minimize fraud in company's operations that decrease financial performance of company. One of good corporate governance mechanism was presence of independent board and ownership by institutions, because the agency can monitor agency to improve its performance by increasing company's profits, so company profitability be increased. Corporate governance was expected to suppress or lower the Agency Cost. Agency theory was basis of contractual relationship between principal and agent. Focus of this theory was to determine the most efficient contract that underlies the relationship between principal and agent. Agency theory was based on three assumptions (Eisenhardt, 1989), namely assumptions
www.ijmer.in
13
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
about human nature, organizational and information. Therefore, it can be formulated proposition 2 below. Proposition profitability.
2:
Good
Corporate
Governance
can
increase
company
Effect of Company Size on profitability Company size can be defined as an effort to measure how large a company. Generally, Indonesia researchers use total assets or total sales as a proxy of company size. Company size will be very important for investors and creditors because it associated with investment risk. Rachmawati and Triatmoko (2007) stated that company with large total assets shows the maturity. Company has a positive cash flow and was considered to have good prospects in a relatively long period of time. It also reflects that company relatively more stable and better able to generate profits than firms with small total assets. It can be a positive signal for the market in which investors would prefer to invest in large companies because of financial condition stronger and more profitable operations. Large companies will be preferred because investors get assurance operations and better business prospects in future. Company size with large scale can create high profitability. Therefore, it can be formulated proposition 3 below. Proposition 3: Greater manufacturing company size can increase company profitability. Effect of Social Responsibility on Firm Value Achda (2007) defines corporate social responsibility as company's commitment to responsible to their operation effect in social, economic and environmental life. Although income and employment has significance today but there were many factors that contribute to assessment of social performance to respects the cultural differences of employees, responding to environmental problems, providing high-quality products that safe to use. Corporate social responsibility begins with spirit of philanthropic (charitable), but due to strong pressure from the public, corporate social responsibility become social license for company operation. Originally, corporate social responsibility was shifted from philanthropy corporate citizenship. It means there was reconciliation with social order and further contributes to community. Siallagan and Machfoedz (2006) stated that
www.ijmer.in
14
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
company's main goal was to increase company's market performance. Low quality of earnings can create bad that decreasing company's market performance. Therefore, it can be formulated proposition 4 below. Proposition 4: More extensive corporate social responsibility disclosure can increase Firm Value Effect of Corporate Governance on Firm Value Corporate governance was used by "Board" to drive and control and supervise the organization's resources in an efficient, effective, economical and productive (Syakroza, 2003). This definition explains that corporate governance as a system was used to direct and manage the activities of company. This system has a great effect to determine business objectives to achieve the target. Corporate Governance implementation in a company can effect on effectiveness, economical and productive so that effect on achievement of corporate objectives. Benefits of Good Corporate Governance will be seen from the premium that investors were willing to pay company equity (market price). It was based on premise that higher the implementation of good corporate governance in a company can provide added value to company. Therefore, it can be formulated proposition 5 below. Proposition 5: Good corporate governance will increase Firm Value. Effect of Company Size on Company Value Rachmawati and Triatmoko (2007) mentions that company with large total assets has reached a maturity stage where company has a positive cash flow and was considered to have good prospects in a relatively long period of time, but it also reflects that company relatively more stable and better able to generate profits than firms with small total assets. Company value can be seen from several approaches. Balance sheet approach assumes that company value was value of its assets. This simple method sees company value from balance sheet. Large company has wider base of stakeholders. Policies of large enterprises will have greater effect on public interest than the smaller companies. For investors, company policy will have implications on cash flow outlook in future. Investors were more interested in company with good financial condition, so that investors will be attracted to make their
www.ijmer.in
15
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
investment, and affect on higher company value. Therefore, it can be formulated proposition 6 below. Proposition 6: Larger company size can increase Firms Value. Effect of Profitability on Firms Value Hermi (2004) revealed the profit was obtained from difference between the incoming treasures (revenue and profit) and outlay (expenses and losses). Profit of company can be held (retained earnings) and can be divided (as cash dividends). Higher net profit can increase the return on investment in form of dividend income to investors. Investors buy company stock to get a return. Higher ability to obtain profit can increase expected return of investors. It makes company’s market performance become better. Company value can be seed from several approaches. Balance sheet approaches see company value as value of its assets. This simple method sees company value in balance sheet. Company income value was based on income statement. Company value can be determined by sales, earnings or other indicators. According to Imelda (2011) company's profitability affect on company value. Therefore, it can be formulated proposition 7 below. Proposition 7: Higher profitability can increase Firm Value. Social Responsibility, Corporate Profitability and Firm Value
Governance,
Company
Size,
Company profitability was company's ability to generate net income from the activity undertaken in an accounting period. Company makes various policies to obtain high profitability; one of them was corporate social disclosure. Corporate social responsibility disclosure was an important issue in world of business. Higher profitability that caused by disclosure of corporate social responsibility may affect company value. investors were not only profitoriented, but also non financial aspects became the focus of attention as corporate social responsibility. In addition, investors have understood the benefits provided when company carry out their social responsibilities. It indirectly makes corporate social responsibility affect on company value. Anggraini (2006) stated more extensive disclosure of corporate social responsibility may affect on high company value through high level of profitability.
www.ijmer.in
16
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Corporate governance explains relationship between various participants in determining the direction of company and company's performance. Corporate governance can easy funding access, improve efficiency in decision making, increase public confidence, and improve transparency and accountability. Good corporate governance able to control and directing the company operations as well as the parties involved in it, so it can be used to eliminate agency problem. Good corporate governance indirectly affect company value, because company with good corporate governance was believed by investors that company's financial performance was very good, as seen from the ratio of company's profitability. It can’t be separated from the implementation of good corporate governance that can monitor insider with good performance, by increasing company's profits. Almilia and Ikka (2007) states that good corporate governance can improve the company's stock performance that contributes to high firm value. Company size indicates companies scale. Companies with large scale have a greater incentive to improve profitability, because company has complex operational activities than small firms. Rachmawati and Triatmoko (2007) stated that company with large total assets shows the maturity. Company has a positive cash flow and was considered to have good prospects in a relatively long period of time. It also reflects that company relatively more stable and better able to generate profits than firms with small total assets. Large companies will be preferred because investors have better assurance operations and business prospects in future. Company size with large scale was able to create high profitability, and indirectly affect on company value. Therefore, it can be formulated proposition 8 below. Proposition 8: Corporate Social Responsibility, Corporate Governance, and Company Size affected Firm Value, with Profitability as an intervening variable. RESEARCH MODEL Based on proposition that showing relationship between variables, the research model can be described in Figure 1 below.
www.ijmer.in
17
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Figure 1. Research Model.
Basis to establish research model and research propositions can be shown below. P1: P2: P3: P4:
Dierkes and Antal, 1985; Gray et al., 1995; Byus et.al., 2010. Shleifer and Vishny, 1997; Eisenhardt, 1989; Al-Rhased, 2010; Rachmawati and Triatmoko, 2007; Mak and Kusnadi, 2002; Achda, 2007; Siallagan and Machfoedz, 2006; Wahyudi and Pawestri, 2006; Susilowati, 2008. P5: Syakroza, 2003; Sotojo and Aldridge, 2005; Avita , 2010. P6: Rachmawati and Triatmoko, 2007; P7: Hermi, 2004; Imelda, 2011. P8: Anggraini, 2006; Almilia and Ikka, 2007; Rachmawati and Triatmoko, 2007; CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS Conclusion Based on research model presented above, it can be delivered the following explanation related to condition of public companies manufacturing in Indonesia. 1. Social Responsibility level can affect the profitability of manufacturing companies. It was because most manufacturing companies have been aware the benefits of corporate social responsibility implementation that supported by corporate social responsibility disclosure.
www.ijmer.in
18
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
2. Good Corporate Governance can lead to higher profitability of manufacturing company. It was because with higher institutional ownership can increase company profitability. 3. Larger companies can increase the profitability of a manufacturing company. It was because manufacturing company generally show large scale. 4. Social Responsibility disclosure level may increase in company value. That was because manufacturing companies were aware of benefits received from the application of practices and corporate social responsibility disclosure broadly. 5. Good Corporate Governance can trigger to increase value of manufacturing companies. This was due to high awareness of manufacturing companies to implement good corporate governance as a necessity, not just compliance with existing regulations. 6. Larger Companies can increase the value of manufacturing firms. That was because manufacturing companies generally have large size. 7. Higher profitability can increase the value of manufacturing firms. That was because company able to generate profits for shareholders with their own capital owned. 8. Social Responsibility, Corporate Governance, and Company Size indirectly may affect on company value through Profitability. This was because that with more extensive disclosure of Corporate Social Responsibility, better corporate governance, and larger company size can create high profitability, and therefore contributes to high firms value. Suggestion Studies presented above were a theoretical examination that still needs further verification. Therefore, for further research were expected to conduct empirical research in order to prove whether the proposition can be accepted or rejected. References 1. Abbot. 2000. The Concept of legalization dalam international organization. Journal legalization and world politics. Vol. 54, No.3. Summer 2000. 2. Akerlof, G. A. 1970. The Market for “Lemons”: Quality Uncertainty and the Market Mechanism. The Quarterly Journal of Economics 84 (3): 488500. 3. Almilia, L.S., dan D. Wijayanto. 2007. Pengaruh Environmental Performance Dan Environmental Disclosure Terhadap Economic Performance. Proceedings The 1st Accounting Conference. 4. Almus, M. and E. Nerlinger. 2000. Testing 'Gibrat's Law' for Young Firms Empirical Results for West Gennany'. Small Business Economics. Vol. 15, No.2 p.1-12.
www.ijmer.in
19
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
5. Al-Rashed, W. E. 2010. Corporate Performance Under Corporate Governance In The GCC Countries. Malaysian Accounting Review. Vol. 9, No. 2 p.139-16. 6. Amato, L. and R. P. Wilder. 2001. The Effects of Firm Size on Profit Rates in US Manufacturing. Journal of Law and Economics. Vol. 34, No. 3 p.181190. 7. AmirKhalkhali, S. and Mukhopadhyay, A. K. 1993. The influence of Size and RD on the Growth of Firms in the U.S. Eastern Economic Journal. Vol.19, No. 2 p.223-233. 8. Ammar, A., Hanna, A.S., Nordheim, E.V., and Russell, J. 2003. Indicator Variables Model of Firm’s Size-Profitability Relationship of Electrical Costractors Using Financial and Economic Data. Journal of Construction Engineering and Management. Vol. 129, No.2 p.192-197. 9. Audretsch, D. B., L. Klomp, E. Santarelli and A. R. Thurik. 2004. Gibrat's Law: Are the Services Different?. Review of Industrial Organization. Vol. 24, No.2 p.301-324. 10. Balabanis, George, Phillips, Hugh C., Lyall, and Jonathan. 1988. Corporate Social Responsibility & Economic Performance in the Top British Companies: Are They Linked ?. European Business Review. Vol. 98, No.1 p.25-44. 11. Barkemeyer, Ralf. 2007. Legetimacy as a key driver and determinant of CSR in Developing Countries. Paper for the 2007 Marie Curie Summer School on Earth System Governance, 28 may-06 june 2007. 12. Bauer, R., N. Gunster and R. Otten. 2004. Empirical Evidence on Corporate Governance in Europe: the Effect on Stock Returns, Firm Value and Performance. Journal of Asset Management. Vol. 5, No. 2 p.91-104. 13. Brammer, S., C. Brooks, and S. Pavelin. 2008. Corporate Social Performance and Stock Returns: UK Evidence from Disaggregate Measures. Working Paper Series. 14. Brigham, E.F and J.F Houston. 1999. Majamenen Keuangan. Jakarta : Erlangga. 15. Brigham, EF and LC Gapenski. 2006. Fundamental of financial management. Jakarta: Salemba Empat. 16. Byus, K., D. Deis, and B. Ouyang. 2010. Doing Well by Doing Good: Corporate Social Responsibility and Profitability. SAM Advanced Management Journal. Vol. 3, No.1 p.44-55. 17. Caves, R. E. 1998. Industrial Organization and New Findings on the Turnover and Mobility of Firms. Journal of Economic Literature. Vol. 36, No.4 p.141-149. 18. Chesher, A, 1979. Testing the Law of Proportionate Effect. Journal of Industrial Economics. Vol.5, No.2 p.403-11. 19. Coad, C. G. 2007. The Effect Of Firm Size On Financial Reporting. Journal of Accounting and Economics 33 : 375-400.
www.ijmer.in
20
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
20. Dahlia dan Veronica. 2008. Pengaruh Corporate Social Responsibility terhadap Kinerja Perusahaan (Studi Empiris Pada Perusahaan yang Tercatat Di Bursa Efek Indonesia pada Tahun 2005 dan 2006). Jurnal FE UNS. Semarang. 21. Del monte dan Papagni. 2003. The distorting effect of the prudent-man laws on institusional equity investment. Journal of Financial Economics 17 ; 145-176. 22. Desyah Kurniawan. 2010. Analisis pengaruh rasio keuangan terhadap nilai perusahaan (Studi Empiris Pada Perusahaan yang terdaftar di BEI tahun 2008, 2009, dan 2010). Jurnal Ekonomi Bisnis dan Akuntansi. 23. Donaldson, T. and Preston, L. E. 1995. The stakeholder theory of the Corporation: Concepts, evidence, and implications. The Academy of Management Review. Vol. 20, No.2 p.65-91. 24. Donovan, Gary and Gibson, Kathy (2002). Environmental Diclosure in the corporate annual report : a longitudinal Australian study. paper for presentation in the 6th interdisciplinary environmental association conference, montreal Canada. 25. Eisenhardt, K. M. 1989. Agency Theory: An Assement and Review. Academy of management review. Vol. 14, No.2 p.57-74. 26. Ferdinand, Augusty. 2006. Metode Penelitian Manajemen: Pedoman Penelitian Untuk Penulisan Skripsi, Tesis dan Disertasi Ilmu Manajemen. Semarang : Badan Penerbit Universitas Diponegoro. 27. Freeman, E. R. 1984. Strategic Management: A stakeholder approach. Pitman: Marshfield MA. 28. Griffin, J. J. and Mahon, J. F. 1997. The corporate social performance and corporate financial performance debate: Twenty-five years of incomparable research. Business and Society Review. Vol. 36, No.1 p.5-31. 29. Hart, P. E. and Oulton, N. 1996. Growth and Size of Firms. Economic Journal. Vol. 5, No. 2 p.1242-1252. 30. Haruman, Tendy. 2008. Pengaruh Struktur Kepemilikan terhadap Keputusan Keuangan dan Nilai Perusahaan (Survei pada Perusahaan Manufaktur di PT. Bursa Efek Indonesia). Simposium Nasional Akuntansi XI. 31. Hermawan. 2010. Analisa Faktor-faktor yang mempengaruhi financial Reporting oleh perusahaan publik yang terdaftar di BEJ. Jurnal Akuntansi dan Keuangan 8 (1) ; 75-90. 32. Hermi, 2004. Hubungan Laba Bersih dan Arus Kas Operasi terhadap Dividen Kas pada Perusahaan Perdagangan Besar Barang Produksi di Bursa efek Jakarta pada Periode 1999-2002. Media Riset Akuntansi, Auditing, dan Informasi. Vol. 4, No.3, p.247-258 33. Higgins, C. Robert. 2006. Analysis for financial management, Eight Edition. Singapure : Mc. Graw Hill.
www.ijmer.in
21
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
34. Hillman, A. J. and Keim, G. D. 2001. Shareholder value, stakeholder management, and social issues: What's the bottom line?. Strategic Management Journal. Vol. 22, Vol.3 p.125-136. 35. Husnan, Suad. 2000. Manajemen Keuangan Teori dan Penerapan Keputusan Jangka Pendek. Yogyakarta : Badan Penerbit UGM 36. Iriji, Y. and Simon, H. A. 1974. Interpretations of Departures from the Pareto Curve Firm-Size Distributions. Journal of Political. Vol. 7, No.2 p.15-31. 37. Jensen, M. C. dan W.H. Meckling. 1976. Theory of The Firm: Managerial Behavior, Agency Cost and Ownership Structure. Journal of Financial Economics, Vol.3, p. 305-360. 38. Jensen, M.C. 1993. The Modern Industrial Revolution, Exit, and the Failure of Internal Control System. Journal of Finance. Vol. 48, No. 2 p.831-880. 39. Jhunjhunwala, S. and R. K. Mishra. 2009. Corporate Governance and Corporate Performance. International Journal of Business Research. Vol. 9, No.2 p.62-67. 40. Jones. 1995. Earnings Management during import relief investigations. Journal of Accounting Research 25 (2) : 193-28. 41. Kusumadilaga, Rimba. 2010. Pengaruh Corporate Sosial Responsibility terhadap nilai perusahaan dengan profitabilitas sebagai variabel moderating (studi empiris pada perusahaan manufaktur yang terdaftar di bursa efek indonesia). Jurnal FE UNS.Semarang. 42. Larcker, D. F., S. A. Richardson and I. Tuna. 2005. Ratings Add Fire to The Governance Debate. Financial Times, Mastering Corporate Governance. Part Two. 43. Mak dan Kusnadi, 2002 44. Mak dan Kusnadi. 2002. Pengaruh Penerapan Good Corporate Governance,dan Manajemen laba terhadap Kinerja Keuangan Perusahaan. Jurnal Akuntansi Universitas Gunadarma. Vol.2 No.1, p.1-24. 45. Margolis, J. D. and Walsh, J. P. 2003. Misery Loves Companies: Rethinking Social Initiatives by Business. Administrative Science Quarterly. Vol. 48, Vol.5 p.268-305. 46. McGuire, J. B., A. Sundgren and Schneeweis. 1988. Corporate Social Responsibility and Firm Financial Performance. Academy of Management Journal. Vol. 31, No. 5 p.354-372. 47. Mcwilliams A., Siegel D. 2001.Corporate social responsibility and financial Performance: correlation or misspecification?. Strategic Management Journal. Vol. 21, No. 5 p.603-609. 48. Orlitzky, M, Schmidt, F.L., and Rynes, S.L. 2003. Corporate Social and Financial Performance: A Meta-Analysis. Organization Studies. Vol. 24, No.3 p.403-441.
www.ijmer.in
22
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
49. Sembiring, Eddy Rismanda. 2005. Karakteristik Perusahaan dan Pengungkapan Tanggung jawab Sosial: Studi Empiris pada Perusahaan yang Tercatat di Bursa Efek Jakarta. Simposium Nasional Akuntansi 8. 50. Shleifer, A. and R.W. Vishny. 1997. A Survey of Corporate Governance. Journal of Finance. Vol. 52, No.2 p.737-783. 51. Siallagan. H, dan M. Machfoedz. 2006. Mekanisme Corporate Governance, KualitasLlaba dan Nilai Perusahaan. Simposium Nasional Akuntansi IX. 52. Siswanto Sutojo dan Aldridge, E. John. 2005. Good Corporate Governance : Tata Kelola Perusahaan Yang Sehat. Jakarta : PT. Damar Mulia Rahayu 53. Thohiri. 2011. Pengaruh Good Corporate Governance terhadap Kinerja Keuangan Perusahaan (studi empiris pada perusahaan food and beverage yang listed di BEJ). Jurnal Bisnis Strategi. Vol. 9. 54. Ullman, A. 1985. Data in Search of a Theory: A Critical Examination of the Relationship Among Social Performance, Social Disclosure, and Economic Performance. Academy of Management Review. Vol.10, No.1 p.540-577. 55. Waddock, S. A. and Graves, S. B. 1997. The corporate social performancefinancial performance link. Strategic Management Journal. Vol. 18, No.2 p.303-319. 56. Wahyudi, Untung dan Pawestri, Hartini Prasetyaning. 2006. Implikasi Struktur Kepemilikan Terhadap Nilai Perusahaan: Dengan Keputusan Keuangan sebagai Variabel Intervening. Simposium Nasional Akuntansi 9.KAKPM 17. 57. Watts, R. L. and J. L. Zimmerman. 1978. Towards a Positive Theory of the Determination of Accounting Standards. The Accounting Review, Vol. 53, No. 1 p.112-134. 58. Weston, J. Fred., dan Thomas E. Copeland, 1995, Manajemen Keuangan, Edisi 8.Jilid 1. Jakarta : Gelora Aksara Pratama. 59. Wolk, H. I., Tearney, M. G., and Dodd, J. L. 2001. Accounting Theory: A Conceptual and Institutional Approach, Fifth edition. South-Western : College Publishing. 60. Yermack, D. 1996. Higher market valuation of companies with a small board of directors. Journal of Fianacial Economics. Vol. 40, No.2 p.185211.
www.ijmer.in
23
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
INTEGRATED INSTRUCTIONAL MODEL/ CONVENTIONAL TEACHING AND STUDENTS’ INTEREST IN ADVANCED FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING IN NIGERIAN UNIVERSITIES: A COMPARATIVE STUDY Okoli B. E. Department of Business Education Ebonyi State University Abakaliki, Ebonyi State, Nigeria
Nwosu B. 0. Department of Business Education Ebonyi State University Abakaliki, Ebonyi State, Nigeria
Introduction Integrated instructional model is a combination of teaching methods like demonstration, simulation, discussion, question and answer etc. to arouse interest in advanced financial accounting. Integrated Instructional Model can be used by teachers to create learning environment and to specify the nature of activity by which teacher and the learner will be involved during the lesson, thus arousing the students’ interest. It is believed that students stay interested and learn more when lecturers use different techniques ranging from telling a story about the topic, to more involved activities like small students work groups doing collaborative learning projects. Interest according to Agwaga (1993) is a person’s zeal to participate in activities that give him pleasure or joy while Situ (1999) and Chukwu (2000) opined that interest is an expression of like or dislike of something. They seem to agree that interest plays a very important role in learning. That is, a student’s achievement in any field of learning largely depends on how interested he is in that particular field of learning. Hence, interest can be viewed as something that can spur a learner to work harder. Lack of interest on the other hand inhibits learning. A close look at the students’ performance in accounting examinations in Nigerian Universities show that they generally perform poorly. Hence, the www.ijmer.in
24
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
concern is on how to arouse students’ interest in advanced financial accounting. Financial accounting is most times equated with mathematics and this has affected students’ interest in financial accounting. Even the way accounting lecturers deliver their lectures also affect the students’ interest. Hence Lewis (1998) and Eze (1998) noted that the idea of dictating notes in accounting classes and not solving the accounting problems on the chalkboards adversely affects the students’ interest in financial accounting since the course is usually seen as a practical course. The prescription is for an integration of instructional approaches in accounting lectures in order to arouse students’ interest. Statement of the Problem The trends in students’ performance in accounting have been quite discouraging. The lecture method has been criticized and seen as incapable of arousing students interest to enable them improve on their performance in advanced accounting. The criticism lies on the belief that lecture method allows for teacher dominance and students passive role in the teaching and learning of accounting in Nigerian Universities. It is believed that Integrated Instructional model will be able to make the teaching-learning environment to be enthusiastic. Furthermore, Akaniwor (1990) opined that in order to arouse students’ interest in financial accounting, the teaching method to be used should be enthusiastic. He went further to suggest that the lecturer should help students to have positive attitude to the course and also inspire students in order to open their neural pathways, hence enhancing their achievement in financial accounting. While it could not be said that the current lack of interest in accounting on the part of the students is as a result of the current traditional model of instruction, convincing argument in favour of the integrated model cannot be successfully presented without subjecting the approach to a thorough empirical screening. The study, therefore, focused on the problem of verifying the www.ijmer.in
25
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
effects of integrated instructional model on students’ interest in advanced financial accounting. It became necessary to determine whether integrating instructional model will help to arouse the interest of students in advanced financial accounting. Purpose of the Study The study aimed at determining the effects of integrated instructional model on students’ interest in advanced financial accounting. Specially, the study sought to: 1) Ascertain the effects of integrated instructional model on students’ mean interest in advanced financial accounting. 2) Ascertain the effects of an integrated instructional method on the mean interest of male and female students in advanced financial accounting. 3) Determine the interaction effects of instructional approach and gender o students’ mean interest in advanced financial accounting. Research Questions 1) What is the effect of integrated instructional model on the mean interest of students in advanced financial accounting? 2) What is the effect of integrated instructional model on the mean interest of male and female students in advanced financial accounting? 3) What is the interaction effect of instructional approach and gender on students mean interest in advanced financial accounting?
www.ijmer.in
26
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Hypotheses Ho1: There is no significant difference in the mean interest scores of students taught advanced financial accounting using the integrated approach and those taught using the conventional approach. H02: There is no significant difference in the mean interest scores of male and female students taught advanced financial accounting using the integrated approach. Ho3: The interaction effect of gender and instructional approach on students’ mean interest in advanced financial accounting will not be significant. Methods The instrument used for the study was the Financial Accounting Interest Inventory (FAIl) which was a four point response scale designed to measure students’ interest in financial accounting. The items were designed to measure the four dimensions of interest in financial accounting namely the academic, leisure, vocational and general interest. The population for the study comprised of all the final year accounting students in all twelve universities in the South-East geopolitical zone of Nigeria. Four universities were selected from all the universities through a simple random sampling technique. Out of the four universities, two were assigned to the treatment group while the other two were assigned to the control group. This was also done through a simple random sampling technique. The control group was made up of 241 students while the experimental group was made up of 296 students. Results Research Question 1 What is the effect of integrated instructional model on the students’ mean interest in advanced financial accounting? www.ijmer.in
27
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Table 1:
The effect of integrated instructional model on
students mean interest in advanced financial accounting Group
Adjusted mean
SD
N
Integrated method
65.31
6.12
296
Conventional Method
37.12
6.83
241
In Table 1, the integrated instructional method yielded a mean interest score of 65.31 with standard deviation of 6.12 while the conventional method yielded a mean of 37.12 with a standard deviation of 6.38. The results revealed that the integrated instructional approach is better than the conventional approach in arousing students’ interest in advanced financial accounting. Research Question 2 What is the effect of integrated instructional approach on the mean interest of males and females in advance financial accounting? Table 2:
The effect of integrated instructional model on the mean interest of male and female students in advanced financial accounting.
Group
Adjusted mean
SD
N
Males
65.09
6.40
122
Females
65.46
5.93
174
Table 2, showed that male students had a mean of 65.09 and a standard deviation of 6.40, while the female students had a mean of 65.46 and a standard deviation of 5.93. The result revealed that the Integrated www.ijmer.in
28
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Instructional Model does not appear to have a pronounced differential effect on the interest of males and females in advanced financial accounting. Research Question 3 What is the interaction effect of Instructional Approach and gender on students’ mean interest in advanced financial accounting? Table 3: The interaction effect of instructional approach and gender on students’ mean interest in advanced financial accounting. Group
Male
Female
Integrated method
65.09
65.46
Conventional Method
37.89
36.45
Table 3 showed that males and females taught using Integrated Approach had a mean interest score of 65.09 and 65.46 while the males and females taught using conventional method had a mean interest score of 37.89 and 36.45 respectively. The results indicated that there was no interaction between method and gender on students’ mean interest in Advanced Financial Accounting. This is because at all levels of gender, the mean interest score was higher for the Integrated Approach. Hypotheses Ho1:
There is no significant difference in the mean interest scores of students taught advanced financial accounting using the integrated approach and those taught using the conventional approach.
www.ijmer.in
29
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Ho2:
The interaction effect of gender and instructional approach on students mean interest in advanced financial accounting will not be significant. Data obtained with the interest inventory were used to test these hypotheses.
Table 4:
Analysis of co-variance (ANC OVA) for students overall interest scores Interaction.
by
Instructional
Approaches
Source of Variation
Sum of Squares
df
Mean Square
F.Cal
Covariates
7084.076
1
7084.076
204.505
Main effect
102228.200
2
51114.100
1475.574
Methods
102037.437
1
102037.437
2945.642
Gender
20.885
1
20.885
.603
2 way interaction (method and gender)
26.126
1
26.126
.754
Explained
109338.401
4
27334.600
789.102
Residual
1828.552
532
34.640
Total
127766.953
536
238.371
and
FCV
3.86
3.86
For Ho1, the result revealed that F.cal (2945.6420) is greater than F. critical value, so the researchers reject the null hypothesis and conclude that there is no significant difference in the mean interest scores of students taught Advanced Financial Accounting using the Integrated www.ijmer.in
30
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Approach and those taught using the Conventional Method. On the test of interaction, the result revealed that the calculated value (.603) is less than the critical value at the given level of significance. Based on this, the null hypothesis was upheld. Ho3: There is no significant difference in the mean interest scores of males and females taught Advanced Financial Accounting using the Integrated Approach. Table 5: Analysis of co-variance (Ancova) for students’ interest scores by gender Source of Variation
Sum of Squares
df
Mean Square
F.Cal FCV
Covariates
1.370
1
1.370
0.36
Main effect
10.340
1
10.340
.275
Gender
10.340
1
10.340
.275
Explained
11.710
2
5.855
.156
Residual
11029.314
293
37.643
Total
11041.024
295
37.427
3.86
Summary of result in table 5 indicates that the f. calculated (.275) is less than the f. critical value (3.86) at an alpha level of 0.05. Hence the null hypothesis was upheld. DISCUSSION Results in table 1 revealed that the Integrated Instructional Approach is better than the Conventional Approach in arousing students’ interest in Advanced Financial Accounting. The Integrated Model yielded a mean interest score of 65.31 with a standard deviation of 6.12 while the conventional method yielded a mean of 37.12 with a standard deviation www.ijmer.in
31
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
of 6.83. The test of significance showed that f. cal (2945.642) is greater than the f. critical value (3.86). Based on the decision rule, the null hypothesis was rejected. The finding agreed with Hamblin (1972) who noted that selection of wrong method in teaching accounts is one of the reasons that kill students’ interest in Accounting. It also agreed with Onwuka (1998) who noted that the way a teacher presents a subject matter determines whether the learners will like or dislike it and that the combination of teaching methods could enhance students’ interest in Financial Accounting. The summary of results presented in table 2 revealed that the integrated instructional approach does not have a pronounced differential effect on interest of male and female students in Advanced Financial Accounting. While male students had a mean of 65.09 and a standard deviation of 6.40, the female students had a mean of 65.46 and a standard deviation of 5.93. The test of significance in table 5 shows there is no significant difference in the mean interest scores of male and female students taught Advanced Financial Accounting using the Integrated Approach. These findings lend credence to Hayes (1998) who noted that physical characteristics of sex seem to be relatively unimportant in terms of ultimate gender role characteristics that the individual eventually adopts. They also agree with Houston (1994) who noted that the psycho-cognitive and psychoaffective characteristics of males and females disappear as they attain maturity. The test of interaction as shown in table 3 indicates no interaction effect between method and gender on students’ interest in Advanced Financial Accounting. This is because mean interest score was higher for the Integrated Instructional Approach than for the Conventional Approach. On tests of significance in table 4, there was no significant interaction. The findings agreed with Merickel (1998) who noted that males and females do not possess outstanding differential instructional traits that could warrant trait interaction in Accounting classes. He noted that Masculinity and Feminity are not pronounced issues in Accounting classes. www.ijmer.in
32
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
CONCLUSIONS Based on the findings, the researcher concluded that: 1) Integrated Instructional Model is better than the Conventional Method in arousing students’ interest in Advanced Financial Accounting. 2) Integrated Instructional Model did not seem to have a pronounced differential effect on the mean interest of males and females in Advanced Financial Accounting. 3) There was no interaction between Instructional Approach and gender on students’ mean interest in Advanced Financial Accounting RECOMMENDATIONS 1) The Integrated Instructional Model should be incorporated in the Financial Accounting Curriculum in order to enhance students’ interest. 2) Educational agencies should enhance the capacity of lecturers in Accounting in the use of Integrated Instructional Approach through Seminars and Workshops. References 1. Agwagah, U.V.N (1993). Instruction in Mathematics reading as a factor interest in problem solving. Unpublished Ph.D Thesis, University of Nigeria. 2. Akaniwor, G. K. (1990). Industrial Education and Technology in Nigeria
Development and Current Trends. Port Harcourt: Pan
Unique Publishers. 3. Chukwu. G. N. (2000). Sustaining Interest in the Teaching and Learning of School Mathematics through Simulation Games. Nigerian Journal of Curriculum Studies, 7 (173), 23-28. www.ijmer.in
33
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
4. Eze. F. 0. C (1988). Book-keeping and Methods for Junior Secondary Schools in Nigeria. The Vocational Educator, 8, 9-10. 5. Harnblin, D. H. (1972). The Teacher and the Pastoral Lane. London: Massachusetts Publishing Company. 6. Haves, N. (1998). Foundations of Psychology: An Introduction. London: Thomas Nelson. 7. Lewis, B. B. (1998). Strategies of Teaching Book-keeping and Accounting. Chicago: South Western Publishing Company. 8. Merickel, M. C. (1998). Integrated Instructional Design. Corvallis: Oregon State University Press. 9. Onwuka, U. (1981). Curriculum Development for Africa. Onitsha: African FEP Publishing Ltd. 10. Situ, A. 0. (1999). Attitudes of Male and Female Students towards Mathematics in Primary Education Studies Department in Colleges of Education. Nigerian Journal of Research in Education 2 (1), 31.
www.ijmer.in
34
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
THE OPPORTUNITIES AND THREATS OF BALINESE WOMEN WORKING ON CRUISE SHIPS I Made Darma Oka Doctorate Programs in Tourism Udayana University, Bali, Indonesia
Made Antara Doctorate Programs in Tourism Udayana University, Bali, Indonesia
I Gede Mudana Doctorate Programs in Tourism Udayana University, Bali, Indonesia
The aims this study is to analyze those women seen from their strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (i.e. SWOT). To obtain data of SWOT, a purposive sampling is done followed by snowball one. All the data are then descriptively analyzed using SWOT analysis. The result of the study shows that the strengths the Balinese workingwomen have are their friendly attitude and being honest, diligent, obedient, full of smile, and responsible for their high scale skills. The weaknesses include low motivation to occupy a certain position, poor English proficiency, lack of self confidence, and less managerial skills. Although they have a lot of opportunity to develop their capacity, their threats are the fact that the government does not pay much attention to them and that the agency office does not give best services. Keywords: the opportunities, the threats, Balinese women, cruise ship. INTRODUCTION Nowadays the Balinese people tend to choose working on the cruise ship. The fact shows them that those who work on the cruise ship have been able to improve their standard of living. The fact that they have been able to satisfy their primary, secondary, and tertiary needs prove this. They, for example, have been able to build more www.ijmer.in
35
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
permanent houses and buy cars. They recognize that they earn much more than they do if they work in Indonesia. In addition, they can widen their insight and become familiar with the other parts of the world. Such facts have motivated others to work on the cruise ship. However, several unexpected things have also happened to the Balinese people who work on the cruise ship. One was involved in maltreatment and raping, and some others died. From 2010 to 2013 the number of the Balinese people who worked on the cruise ship increased dramatically. Similarly, the percentage of the Balinese women who are employed in the cruise line has also increased, although the degree of their participation is less than 10% than that of the men (BP3TKI Denpasar, 2014). Working on the cruise ship needs both adequate hard skill and soft skill; in other words, working on the cruise ship needs the qualification of being competent. Competence means the ability which every individual has; it includes knowledge, skill, and being prepared to do what is supposed to do in accordance with the standard already determined. Hard skill is the competence in knowledge and expertise which an individual should have when doing what is supposed to do such as serving tourists. Soft skill refers to the appearance and working attitude which an individual should have when serving visitors. Apart from that, Sadia and Oka (2012) state that the characteristic of the employment in the cruise ship requires tight discipline and strong physical endurance. In relation to that, this article is intended to analyze the existence of the Balinese women who are employed on the cruise ship from the aspects of the weakness, strength and opportunity they have, and from the aspect of the threat they may face. METHODOLOGY To obtain data of strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats, a purposive sampling is done followed by snowball one. The www.ijmer.in
36
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
aspects of their strength, weakness, and opportunity, and the aspect of the threat they may face are analyzed using the SWOT analysis (strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, threats). According to Rangkuti (2013: 12-20), what is referred to as the SWOT analysis is the way in which various factors are systematically identified in order to formulate a firm’s strategy. This analysis is based on the logic that strengths and opportunities can be maximized; however, at the same time, weaknesses and threats can also be minimized. This analysis compares the external factors which include opportunities and threats, and the internal factors which include strengths and weaknesses. In this present study, this analysis can lead to strategies as to reinforce the women employed in the cruise line. DISCUSSION The reinforcement of the Balinese women employed on the cruise ship is interesting to be explored, as the tourism sector is the public one in which, traditionally (the gender-based division of employment), the only men are employed. In other words, females are supposed to do the activities in the domestic sector such as household chores, washing, and cooking. Sukeni (2006) states that, in spite of such conventional division of employment, the fact shows that the Balinese women, in particular, have been participating in the public sector such as being employed in the tourism industry since the modern tourism was developed in Bali; in other words, they have not only participated in the domestic sector but also in the public sector. Furthermore, it is stated that tourism has contributed to the equality of gender. The reason is that the conventional division of employment in which the husbands should work in the public sector and the wives should do the domestic jobs has not been strictly applicable. There has not been any strict partition between what is supposed to be done by the husbands and what is supposed to be done by the wives. Their family situation and condition, environment and awareness that their families and www.ijmer.in
37
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
society should be in harmony have been responsible for this. Statistically, the number of females in Bali is almost equal to the number of males. Females total 2.014.300 (49,66%) and males total 2.042.000 (50,34%) (BPS. Prov. Bali, 2014). However, the number of the employed females is lower than the number of the employed males. The ratio is 1,014,052 (44.60%) to 1,259,845 (55.40%) (Disnakertrans Bali, 2013). This means that the tourism in Bali should be developed with an orientation towards gender equality and justice. In other words, the tourism in Bali should be developed by taking the men’s and women’s rights and obligations equally, proportionately equitably into account. In this present study, the Balinese women refer to those who belong to the Balinese ethnic group, who are Hindus and still employed or have been employed on the cruise ship. They keep struggling for justice and equality in their daily role in tourism. Triguna (2002: 32) states that such a struggle is a challenge for the Balinese Hindu women in the future. Their failure does not only result from their inability but also from their social condition. They should accept their failure. Therefore, the Balinese women keep struggling for their rights so that they will be equal to men in tourism including on the cruise ship. Professional human resources are needed to operate a cruise ship. In other words, human resources strategically determine the existence of the tourism industry in general and the cruise line in particular. Therefore, the competence of the Balinese women who are employed on the cruise ship should be so internationally standard that they will be able to compete with the human resources coming from other countries. It is interesting to discuss and use women as the object of a study. The reason is that women are frequently used as an object rather than as a partner in the tourism industry. Women should be www.ijmer.in
38
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
made to be prepared and the tourism agents and the government should pay serious attention to the Balinese women as the attempts to reinforce them in the cruise line. The information obtained from the interview in which the interviewees or informants were the Balinese women, and from the user as the agent which send the Balinese women to the cruise ship can be categorized into four. They are the strength, weakness, and opportunity they have and the threat they may face as described as follows: 1. The strengths of the Balinese Women who Work on the Cruise Ship Strength is something which the Balinese women who work on the cruise shop have which makes them feasible to be employed on the cruise shop. In this case, the strength is identical with the competence which should be maintained by the Balinese women. As far as the Balinese women who work on the cruise ship are concerned, they have the following strengths. a. Being friendly; easily smiling when doing what they are supposed to do, giving the impression that they like their jobs on the cruise ship. b. Being honest and simple when doing what they are responsible for, making them preferred by other employees. c. Being persistent; being faithful, and complaining is not what they like, making the management feel comfortable to allocate jobs for them. d. Being responsible for what they are supposed to do, causing them to be given priority in the recruitment process. e. Being more skilled than the employees coming from other countries.
www.ijmer.in
39
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
2. The Weaknesses which the Balinese Women who Work on the Cruise Ship May Have Weakness refers to something which the Balinese women who work on the cruise ship lack, which should be deleted and overcome in order to be more competitive in the current globalized era. In this case, the Balinese women who work in the cruise line lack several things as follows. a. Being less motivated to occupy a high position on the cruise ship industry; their main motivation is to generate money. b. Their English is not as good as that of the employees coming from other countries. c. They are less confident and have less managerial skill than the female employees coming from other countries; if they are offered a higher position, they often kindly refuse it. 3. The Opportunities which the Balinese Women who Work on the Cruise Ship Have In this case, an opportunity refers to a chance, which, if taken by the Balinese women, makes them feasible to hold a better position in the cruise ship industry. The opportunities they have are as follows. a. More and more opportunities are available on the cruise ship, as more and more cruises ships are operated. b. They are given priority to be employed on the cruise ship as they have better soft skill. c. There are a very limited number of the Balinese women who are interested in working on the cruise ship, as, culturally, they have to be separated from their families.
www.ijmer.in
40
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
4. The Threats which the Balinese Women who Work on the Cruise Ship May Face The threats or challenges which the Balinese women who work on the cruise ship may face should be soon anticipated. Therefore, the government, the tourism agent, and society should synergize to anticipate the threats they may face. The threats which the Balinese women who work on the cruise shop may face are as follows. a. The Indonesian government has paid less attention to the Balinese women who work on the cruise shop. Unlike the Philippines and India, they have paid better attention to their workforce. They facilitate those who are interested in working on the cruise ship. b. The agent tends not to seriously serve those who are interested in working on the cruise ship; for example, it should help the candidates to arrange for the documents they need. c. The agent does not treat those who are interested in working on the cruise shop as it should. The characteristics of the Balinese women who work on the cruise shop should be first identified using SWOT analysis in order to be able to identify what strategies should be applied to reinforce them in the industry of the cruise ship. The SWOT analysis can be used to identify the characteristics of the Balinese people from various perspectives which can be used as the basis for designing the reinforcement program in the future which is adjusted to the external and internal condition. The basic concept of the SWOT analysis seems to be simple, as stated by Sun Tzu (in Rangkuti, 2013: x) that “if we know our strengths and weaknesses and the strengths and weaknesses of our rivals, we will certainly win the battle”. Currently, the SWOT analysis www.ijmer.in
41
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
is not only used to design the strategy used in a battle, but it is also used to design the business strategy planning including the industry of tourism. The objective is to win the competition which is getting tighter such as in the reinforcement of women in the cruise ship industry. The SWOT analysis is highly situational, meaning that the current result of analysis will not be exactly the same as the result of analysis in the future. It is necessary for the government, the tourism agent, and society to pay attention to the SWOT components in order to be able to reinforce the Balinese women better. The strengths that the women have should be maintained well. The weaknesses they have should be overcome and deleted if possible. The opportunities available should be well made use of. The threats should be well anticipated so that the Balinese women will be more competitive in the future. In this way, improvement should be made in order to be able to reinforce the Balinese women better so that they can give more contribution to the tourism industry and their life in the future. Based on the analysis of the existence of the Balinese women working on the cruise ship above, and the strengths and opportunities they may have, the alternatives which can be recommended to support the reinforcement of the Balinese women are as follows: 1. The Strategy of Strengths-Opportunities (S-O) This strategy is created based on the condition of the Balinese women who work on the cruise ship, using all the strengths they may have to make use of the opportunities available, and can be formulated as follows. a. Making use of the job opportunities available on the cruise ship. This strategy then leads to the following programs are: (1) Providing the training course in hotel management, (2) Carrying out Competence Test.
www.ijmer.in
42
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
b. Motivating the Balinese women to work on the cruise ship, through the following programs are: (1) Giving elucidation to the Balinese women, (2) Inviting an intellectual as a speaker. 2. The Weakness-Opportunities (W-Q) Strategy This strategy is applied based on the available opportunities made use of by overcoming the weaknesses which the Balinese women who would like to work on the cruise ship may have. Based on the weaknesses and opportunities available (W-O) the programs needed can be formulated as follows. a. The English and the managerial aspects of the Balinese women who work on the cruise ship should be improved. The programs which are included here are: (1) Providing English course, (2) Giving management/leadership training. 1) Motivating the Balinese women that it is necessary for them to have career in the future. Based on this strategy, the programs can be formulated as follows. (1) Giving a talk concerning personality, (2) Inviting a motivator to come as a speaker. 3. The Strategy of Strengths-Threats (S-T) This strategy is applied using the strengths which the Balinese women have to avoid any threat which they may face. The S-T strategy includes: a. Increasing the role played by the government to protect the Indonesian people who are employed on the cruise ship effectively. In relation to this strategy, the programs which can be formulated are as follows. (1) Socializing the Act concerning Manpower, (2) Coping with the case which the Indonesian people who are employed on the cruise ship may have. b. Improving the services provided by the agent to the Indonesian people who are employed on the cruise ship. The programs which www.ijmer.in
43
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
can be formulated for this strategy are as follows. (1) Encouraging the agent to work professionally, (2) Encouraging the agent to act justly. 1. The Weaknesses-Threats (W-T) Strategy This strategy is based on defensive activities and is intended to minimize the weaknesses which the Balinese women have and to avoid any threat they will probably face. This strategy includes: a. Increasing the attention paid by the government to those who are interested in working on the cruise ship. The programs that can be formulated for this strategy are as follows. (1) Facilitating free of charge education/training, (2) Gathering those who have been successfully working in the cruise line. b. Increasing supervision of the cruise ship agent. Several programs can be formulated for this strategy. (1) Regular supervision, (2) Action against the agent should be taken if it is discriminative. CLOSING Based on the results of the study, the strengths of the Balinese women include being friendly, easily smiling, being honest, being persistent, being faithful and complaining is what they do not like. In addition, they are also highly competent and responsible. Their weaknesses include being less motivated to hold higher positions, their English is not good, being less self confident, and having inadequate managerial aspect. The job opportunities on the cruise ship are highly available. The threats they may face include the attention paid by the government is not closely related to the manpower protection; the services provided by the agent are inadequate. The elucidation, educational, and training programs that career, mentality, being able to communicate in English, and managerial aspect are important should be provided. In addition, the agent should also be controlled in the
www.ijmer.in
44
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
recruitment process. It is suggested that the government and the tourism agents should synergize to implement effectively the rules regulating manpower. To the Balinese women who would like to work in the cruise line, it is suggested that they should prepare their soft and hard skills maturely so that they will be able to win every competitor as they should always keep a good reputation for themselves, their families, and nation. Acknowledgments I am thankful to all informan to for providing me information and kind support throughout the research work. I am also thankful to the God. References 1. Badan Pusat Statistik (BPS) Prov. Bali. 2014. Bali dalam Angka Bali in Figure 2013. Denpasar. 2. Balai Pelayanan Penempatan dan Perlindungan Tenaga Kerja Indonesia (BP3TKI). 2014. Penempatan TKI Tahun 2013. Denpasar. 3. Dinas Tenaga Kerja dan Transmigrasi Prov. Bali (Disnakertrans). 2013. Profil Ketenagakerjaan dan Transmigrasi Daerah Tahun 2013. Denpasar. 4. Hartono, S. 2012. Bekerja di Kapal Pesiar “Panduan Praktis Mengawali Karier di Kapal Pesiar” Solo: Cet. 1. 5. Rangkuti, F. 2013. Analisis SWOT Teknik Membedah Kasus Bisnis. Jakarta: Gramedia Pustaka Utama. Cet. 17. 6. Sadia, I K. dan Oka, I M. D. 2012. Motivasi Tenaga Kerja Bali Bekerja di Mediterranean Shipping Company (MSC). Jurnal Sosial Humaniora. 2 (3), 221-236. 7. Sukeni, N. N. 2006. Dampak Pariwisata terhadap Gender di Bali. Jurnal Studi Gender Srikandi. VI. (1), 1-13. 8. Triguna, I B. G. Y. 2000. Mengenal Teori-Teori Pembangunan. Denpasar: Widya Dharma. Ed. 1. Cet. 1.
www.ijmer.in
45
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
A BIRD’S EYE VIEW ON THE ROLE OF EUNUCHS WITH COUNTRY WISE AND RELIGION WISE K.Chandrasekhara Rao Research Scholar P.G.Dept. of Legal Studies Acharya Nagarjuna University, Guntur Introduction: A eunuch is a man who may have been castrated. However in some ancient texts, eunuch may refer to a man who is not castrated but who is impotent, celibate or other-wise not inclined to marry and procreate. The earliest records for intentional castration to produce eunuchs are from the Sumerian city of Lagash in the 21st Century B.C. Over the millennia since, they have been performing myriad varieties of functions in different cultures such as coutier or equivalent domestics, treble singers, religious specialists, soldiers, royal guards, government officials, and guardians of women or harem servants. They would most probably be servants or slaves because of their function had been castrated usually in order to make them reliable servants of a royal court. They are normally used for the lowest domestic functions such as making the ruler’s bed, bathing him, cutting his hair, carrying his litter, and in certain occasions they are used for carrying messages as ‘the ruler’s ear’ and trusted servant. They are seems to be more trustworthy towards courtier functions rather than private affairs in the society since it look down upon the eunuchs. In cultural programmes, they were sometimes used as harem servants. Origin and growth of Eunuchs: Eunuch is derived from the Greek word eunoukhos, which was used by Hipponex, the 6th century comic poet. He delineated it as certain lower of fine food having consumed his estate dining lavishly and at leisure every day on tuna and garlic-honey cheese pate like a www.ijmer.in
46
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Lampsacene eunoukhos. From the early 5th century onwards in ancient classical literature, the word ‘eunuch’ generally designates some incapacity for or abstention from procreation, whether due to natural constitution or to physical mutilation. However Lucian suggested two methods to determine whether someone is a eunuch or not: one is physical inspection of the body and the rest is scrutiny of his ability to perform sexually with females. The 5th century Etymologicon by Orion of Thebes offers two alternative origins for the word eunuch : first, to ten eunen ekhein, “guarding the bed” as “bed chamber attendants” in the imperial place and the second, to eu tou nou ekheir, “ being good with respect to the mind”, being deprived of male-female intercourse. However in Liddell and Scotts Greek-English Lexicon, it was shown as noos, euhoos and ekhein. Further it was cited by the 9th century Byzantine Emperor LeoVI in his New Constitution as banning the marriage of eunuchs and in which he noted that eunuchs reputation as trustworthy guardians of the marriage bed (eune) and claimed that the word ‘eunuch’ attested to this
kind of employment. The 11th century
Byzantine monk Nikon of Black Mountain had stated that the word ‘eunuch’ came from ‘eunoein’ where in ‘eu’ means ‘good’ and ‘nous’ means ‘mind’. Further Theophylact of Ohrid has stated that the word ‘eunuch’ came from ‘eunoein’ and ‘ekhein’ which means “ to have, hold”, since
they were always ‘well-disposed’ towards his
master who “held” or owned them. The 12th century, Etymolgicum Magnum has also repeated the same. The 12th Century, Eusthathius of Thessalonica has stated that the word ‘eunuch’ derived, from ‘eunis +okheuein’, which means ‘deprived of mating’. The Luther Bible or the kind James Bible stated the
word ‘eunuchs’ which
found in the Latin Vulgate which means ‘bed-keeper’. The early 17th century scholar and theologian Gerardus Vossius stated that the word is derived from eune and ekhein, which means ‘bed-keeper’. After www.ijmer.in
47
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
making a thorough research in this aspect, eventually he sumps up his argument and stated that the word “originally signified continent men” to whom the care of women was entrusted and later came to refer to castration because “among foreigners” the role was performed “by those with mutilated bodies”. In an influential 1925 essay, Ernst Mass suggested that “the Eustathius’s derivation can or must be laid to rest” and affirmed the derivation from ‘eune and ekhein’, which means guardian of the bed. Region-wise and Country-wise role of Eunuchs: Ancient Middle East: Eunuchs played a pivotal role in Assyrian Empire during 850622 BCE and in the court of Egyptian pharaohs. They held powerful positions in the Achaemenide court. The eunuch ‘Bagoas’ was the Vizier of Artaxerxes III and IV and played a powerful role behind the throne. Ancient Greece, Rome and Byzantium: Deming the period of Raman Empire i.e., in the reign of Diocletian and Constantine, emperors were surrounded by eunuchs to perform bathing, hair cutting, dressing and other bureaucratic functions. They were believed to be loyal and indispensable. Like-wise in the Byzantine Imperial Court, great number of eunuchs employed in domestic and administrative functions. Under Justinian in the 6th century, the eunuch Narses functioned as a successful general in a number of campaigns. Following the Byzantine tradition, eunuchs had important tasks in the court of the Norman kingdom of Sicily during the middle 12th century. Out of them, one is Philip of Mahdia, admiratus admiratorum and another one is peter the caid, Prime-Minister.
www.ijmer.in
48
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Chaina: In China, Castration included removal of the penis as well as testicles as a means of gaining employment in the imperial service. Certain eunuchs gained immense power that occasionally superseded even the grand secretaries. Zheng He, who lived during the Ming Dynasty is one among them. In many cases, they were considered to be more reliable than the scholar officials. Similar system was existed in Vietnam. At the end of Ming Dynasty, there were about 70,000 eunuchs employed by the emperor for serving inside the imperial place. The khitan Liao Dynasty adopted the practice of using eunuchs from the Chinese, who were non-khaitan prisoners of war. They developed a harem system with concubines and wives and adopted eunuchs as part of it. Korea: In Korea, eunuchs were called as Naesi, who were officials to the king and other royal traditions of Korean society. Naesi system consists of two ranks. One is sangs eon, senior official and the second rank is Naegwan, junior Official. They were the only males outside the royal family allowed to stay inside the palace over night having much socioeconomic status. Vietnam: It adopted the eunuch system from China. They served as slaves to the Vietnamese palace women in the harem like the consorts, concubines, maids, Queen and princesses. The only man allowed in the palace was the emperor and his women besides eunuchs since they were not able to have sexual relations with the women. They were assigned to do work of the palace women like messaging, make up to the women and preparing them for sex with the Emperor.
www.ijmer.in
49
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Thailand: In Siam, Indian Muslims from the Coramandal Coast served as eunuchs in the Thai Palace and Court. The Thai at times asked eunuchs from China to visit the court in Thailand and advise them on court ritual since they held them in high regard. Burma: Sir Henry Yule saw many Muslims serving as eunuchs in Konbaung Dynasty Burma while on
a diplomatic mission. They
came from Arakan. Ottoman Empire: Eunuchs were typically slaves imported from outside their domains. There were two categories : Black Eunuchs were Africans who served the concubines and officials in the Harem together with chamber maidens of low rank. The white Eunuchs were Europeans from the Balkans. They served the recruits at the palace school. An important figure in the ottoman court was the Chief Black Eunuch, who involves in almost every palace intrigue and could there by gain power over either the Sultan or one of his Viziers, ministers or other court officials. Bashir Agha is one of the most powerful chief Eunuchs in 1730s. Indian Sub-continent: Eunuchs were frequently employed in imperial palaces by Hindu rulers as servants for female royalty, as guards of the royal harem and as sexual mates for the nobles. Some other occupied high status in the society. One of the best example for the same is Malik Kafur, a Hindu boy captured and enslaved during the raids of the Delhi sultanate in Gujarat. On account of his good looks, he became a sexual favorite with Alauddin Khilja. Raison d’etre, he become Malik Naib and led Khiljis expeditions in southern India. In this reign, they were highly www.ijmer.in
50
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
valued for their strength, ability to provide protection for ladies’ palaces and trustworthiness. They were allowed to live amongst women. This enabled them to serve as messengers, watchmen, attendants and guards for palaces. Often they were also doubled as part of the Kings court of advisers. Eunuchs in the Bible: Eunuchs are mentioned many times in the Bible such as in the Book of Isaiah (56:4). Though the Ancient Hebrews did not practice castration, they were common in other cultures featured in the Bible such as Ancient Egypt Babylonia, the Persian Empire and Ancient Rome. In the Book of Esther, servants of the Harem of Ahasuerus such as Hegai and Shashgaz as well as other servants such as Hatach, Harbonah, Bigthan and Teresh are referred to as Sarisim. The cup bearer who became the Governor of Judah, Nehemiah, may have been a eunuch. Eunuchs in Old testament, the word for enunch, saris could also refer to other servants and officials, who had not been castrated, but served in similar capacities. The reference to ‘eunuchs’ in Matthew 19:12 has yielded various interpretations. Suggestions and Conclusion: Thus there is a vast historical growth and development of Eunuchs in the annals of both ancient period to modern period. Though on many occasions in the ancient period, they occupied pivotal positions and performed quite a good number of functions, at present their life style become a pathetic episode and leading a miserable lives. Castrated men are commonly suffering from advanced prostate cancer. In the USA alone, there are more than 2,00,000 new cases of prostate cancer diagnosed each year. It is extrapolated that over 80,000 of them will be surgically or chemically castrated within 6 months of diagnosis. With the average life expectancy after castration, there are approximately a half million chemically or surgically castrated prostate cancer patients www.ijmer.in
51
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
at any time in USA alone convicted sex offenders who have been castrated are rare, although there is a debate as to whether the drastic reduction of testosterone and the consequent diminishing of libido might have an effect on recidivism. A study on eunuchs has found that they live 13.5 years longer than non-eunuch men as a result of lack of testosterone, which suppressed the immune system and its resultant adverse effects on health. Raison d’etre, the Supreme Court of India aptly said that the LGBT community is only a minuscule fraction of the country’s population, and thereby they are in dire need of protection from the law, to safeguard their rights and freedoms. They are also born like other human beings. Born with these physical deformities is not their fault. Therefore the Government, managements of various institutions and corporate world and the non-governmental organizations shall reckon this aspect with the milk of human kindness, and shall implement such type of plans and developmental programmes by treating the same as social responsibility to bailout them on par with other fellow beings socially, economically, educationally, culturally and all other fronts. References: 1. Romer V.Evans,517 U.S.620(1996) 2. “Archive for Sexology”.hu-berlin.de 3. Lifton,Robert(1986).”The Nazi Doctors: Medical Killing and the Psychology of Genocide”. 4. ‘Lifton’ Nazi Doctors P.42. holocaust-history.org. 5. “Nazi Persection of Homosexuals Retrieved 21 August 2013.
1933-1945”.
Ushmm.org.
6. “Non-Jewish Victims of Holocaust : 5 Million Often Forgotten”. holocaustforgotten .com.1 September1939. Retrieved 21 August 2013. www.ijmer.in
52
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
7. “1957: Homosexuality should not be a crime”. News.bbc.co.uk.BBC. Retrieved 14 February 2015. 8. Jerome Himmelstein, p 97;Spiritual Warfare: The Politics of the Religious Right, P.49-50, Sara Diamong, South End Press, Boston, MA 9. Murray, Stephen O., Homosexualities, University of Chicago 2000 10. “CNN poll: Americans attitudes towards gay community changing”. Politicalticker.blogs.cnn.com.6 June 2012. Retrieved 21 August 2013. 11. “Roman Catholics and Homosexuality”, Ontario Consultants on Religious Tolerance(2006). 12. “Islam and Homosexuality”, Ontario Constructions on Religious Tolerance(2005). 13. “What the Bible says and means about religioustolerance. org.Retrieved 14 july2015.
homosexuality”,
14. “Homosexuality and Islam”,religionfacts.com. Archived from the original on 15 April2015.Retrieved 4 July 2015. 15. “Where is it illegal to be gay?”.BBC News. Retrieved 11 February 2014. 16. “Hinduism: beliefs about love and sex”. BBC.co.uk.BBC GCSE Bitesize. Retrieved 14 July 2015. 17. “Who’s Gay? What’s Straight? – Employment of Homosexuals And other Sex perverts in Government (1950)- Assault on Gay America – Frontline –PBS”.pbs.org.
www.ijmer.in
53
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
MILLENNIUM DEVELOPMENT GOALS AND INDIA’S PROGRESS Dr. Jagadish B Deputy Manager Learning and Development Division Human Resources and Services Group Toyota Kirloskar Motor, Bangalore, India I. INTRODUCTION It has been nearly 14-years since the UN Millennium Declaration came into place. This Declaration pronounced a bold vision and established tangible targets by setting before the world the Millennium Development Goals. Key focus of MDGs has been improving the quality of life and human development around the globe. India joined its hands along with the global movement and has made significant progress in line with achieving the MDG targets. India is a country known for its “Unity in Diversity”. Though diversity is an advantage, it is challenging for the government to address people issues since it has lot of complexities. At the finish line, India has met some targets well ahead of the 2015 deadline. Meanwhile, there are certain targets where in India has to catch up. Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation, Government of India has compiled the progress made in its “Millennium Development Goals: India Country Report 2015”. Key findings are presented here: II.
MDG
1:
ERADICATING
EXTREME
POVERTY
AND
HUNGER Target 1: Halve, between 1990 and 2015, the proportion of people whose income is less than one dollar a day
The all India Poverty Head Count Ratio (PHCR) estimate was 47.8 per cent in 1990. In order to meet the target the PHCR
www.ijmer.in
54
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
level has to be 23.9 per cent by 2015. In 2011-12, the PHCR at all India level is 21.9 per cent, which indicates that, India has already achieved the target well ahead of time.
From the period 2004-05 to 2011-12, the Poverty Gap Ratio (PGR) reduced both in rural and urban areas. In the rural areas, rural Poverty Gap Ratio declined from 9.64 in 2004-05 to 5.05 in 2011-12. Meanwhile, in the urban areas, it declined from 6.08 to 2.70 during the same period. Nearly 50 per cent decline in PGR both in rural and urban areas during 2004-05 to 2011-12 reflects that the conditions of poor have improved both in urban and rural areas.
At all India level, the share of the poorest quintile in the total consumption is lower in the urban areas than in rural areas. During 1993-94 to 2011-12, in urban areas, the indicator (URP methodology) showed a decline from 8.0 per cent in 1993-94 to 6.97 per cent in 2009-10, and then showed a slight improvement 7.1 per cent in 2011-12. In rural areas, the share of poorest quintile steadily declined from 9.6 per cent in 1993-94 to 9.1 per cent in 2011-12.
Target 2: Halve, between 1990 and 2015, the proportion of people who suffer from hunger
It was estimated that in 1990, the proportion of underweight children below three-years was 52 per cent. In order to meet the target, the proportion of under-weight children should decrease to 26 per cent by 2015.
However, the National Family Health Survey shows that, the proportion of under-weight children below three-years declined from 43 per cent in 1998-99 to 40 per cent in 2005-06. At this rate of decline, the proportion of underweight children below 3
www.ijmer.in
55
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
years is expected to reduce to 33 per cent by 2015, which indicates India is falling short of the target. III. GOAL 2: ACHIEVING UNIVERSAL PRIMARY EDUCATION TARGET 5: Ensure that by 2015, children everywhere, boys and girls alike, will be able to complete a full course of primary education.
The Net Enrolment Rate (NER) in primary education (age 6-10 years) was estimated at 84.5 per cent in 2005-06 (U-DISE) and the NER has increased to 88.08 per cent in 2013-14 (U-DISE), and is unlikely to meet the target of universal achievement.
The results from Department of School Education and Literacy (DISE) report 2011-12, shows a steady increasing trend over the years in the estimate of the indicator ‘ratio of enrolment of Grade V to Grade I’ from 78.08 in 2009-10 to 86.05 in 2011-12.
The youth (15-24 years) literacy rate has increased from 61.9 per cent to 86.14 per cent during the period 1991-2011 and the trend shows India is likely to reach 93.38 per cent which is very near to the target of 100 per cent youth literacy by 2015. At national level, the male and female youth literacy rate is likely to be at 94.81 per cent and 92.47 per cent.
IV.
GOAL
3:
PROMOTING
GENDER
EQUALITY
AND
EMPOWER WOMEN Target 4: Eliminate gender disparity in primary, secondary education, preferably by 2005, and in all levels of education, no later than 2015
At present, in primary education, the enrolment is favourable to females as Gender Parity Index (GPI) of Gross Enrolment Ratio (GER) is 1.03 in 2013-14. In secondary education also, gender
www.ijmer.in
56
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
parity has achieved GPI of GER is 1 in 2013-14. In the tertiary level of education, the GPI of GER is 0.89 in 2012-13.
As per Census 2011, the ratio of female youth literacy rate to male youth literacy rate is 0.91 at all India level and is likely to reach the level of 1 by 2015.
The National Sample Survey (NSS) 68th round (2011-12) results had estimated the percentage share of females in wage employment in the non- agricultural sector as 19.3 per cent with corresponding figures for rural and urban areas as 19.9 per cent and 18.7 per cent respectively. There is an improvement in the status as NSS 66th round (2009-10) had reported that the share of women in wage employment is 18.6 per cent at national level and the corresponding estimates for rural and urban India pegged at 19.6 per cent and 17.6 per cent respectively. It is projected that, at this rate of progress, the share of women in wage employment can at best reach a level of about 22.28 per cent by 2015 which is far from the targeted 50 per cent.
As of January 2015, India, the world's largest democracy, has only 65 women representatives out of 542 members in Lok Sabha, while there are 31 female representatives in the 242 member Rajya Sabha and hence presently the proportion of seats in National Parliament held by women is only 12.24 per cent against the target of 50 per cent.
V. GOAL 4: REDUCING CHILD MORTALITY TARGET 5: Reduce by two-thirds, between 1990 and 2015, the under-five Mortality Rate
Under-Five Mortality Ratio (U5MR) was estimated at 125 deaths per 1000 live births in 1990. In order to achieve the target, the U5MR is to be reduced to 42 deaths per 1000 live
www.ijmer.in
57
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
births by 2015. As per Sample Registration System 2013, the U5MR is at 49 deaths per 1000 live births and as per the historical trend, it is likely to reach 48 deaths per 1000 live births, missing the target narrowly. However, an overall reduction of nearly 60 per cent happened during 1990 to 2013, registering a faster decline in the recent past, and if this rate of reduction is sustained, the achievement by 2015 is likely to be very close to the target by 2015.
In India, Infant Mortality Rate (IMR) was estimated at 80 per 1,000 live births in 1990. As per SRS 2013, the IMR is at 40 and as per the historical trend; it is likely to reach 39 by 2015, against the target of 27 infant deaths per 1000 live births by 2015. However, with the sharp decline in the recent years, the gap between the likely achievement and the target is expected to be narrowed.
The Coverage Evaluation Survey estimates the proportion of one year old children immunized against measles at 74 per cent in 2009. Although, there is substantial improvement in the coverage which was 42 per cent in 1992-93, yet at this rate of improvement, India is likely to achieve about 89 per cent coverage by 2015 and thus India is likely to fall short of universal coverage.
VI. GOAL 5: IMPROVING MATERNAL HEALTH Target 6: Reduce by three quarters between 1990 and 2015, the Maternal Morality Ratio
In 1990, the estimated Maternal Mortality Ratio (MMR) was 437 per 1,00,000 live births. In order to meet the MDG target, the MMR should be reduced to 109 per 1,00,000 live births by 2015. As per the latest estimates, the MMR status at all India level is at 167 in 2011-13. As per the historical trend, MMR is likely to
www.ijmer.in
58
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
reach the level of 140 maternal deaths by 2015, however, assuming the recent sharper decline is sustained, India is likely to be slightly nearer to the MDG target.
The Coverage Evaluation Survey conducted by Government of India and UNICEF in 2009 shows that 76.2 per cent percentage of births were attended by skilled health personnel in 2009. Although, considerable progress has been achieved over the years in improving the proportion of births attended by skilled personnel, India is likely to reach the level of 77.29 per cent vis – a vis the targeted universal coverage. The latest results of Sample Registration System (SRS) 2013 reveal that, the percentage of live births attended by skilled health personnel (Government hospitals, Private hospital, qualified professional) is 87.1 per cent in 2013, which indicates a better status.
VII. GOAL 6: COMBATING HIV/AIDS, MALARIA AND OTHER DISEASES TARGET 7: Have halted by 2015 and begun to reverse the spread of HIV/AIDS
The prevalence of HIV among pregnant women aged 15-24 years is showing a declining trend from 0.89 per cent in 2005 to 0.32per cent in 2012-13.
According to NFHS –III in 2005-06, condom use rate of the contraceptive prevalence rate (Condom use to overall contraceptive use among currently married women, 15-49 years, %) was only 5.2 per cent at all India level.
According to Behavioural Surveillance Survey (BSS) conducted in 2001 and 2006, the national estimates for condom use at last high-risk sex (%) (Proportion of population aged 15-24 years who used condom during last sex with non-regular partner)
www.ijmer.in
59
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
registered a 19 per cent increase from 51.9 per cent in 2001 to 61.7per cent in 2006. As per the ‘Condom Promotion Impact Survey 2010’, the national estimate for condom use at last highrisk sex is 74 per cent, thus recording an improvement of 20 per cent during 2006 to 2010.
According to Behavioural Surveillance Survey (BSS), the national estimate for proportion of population aged 15-24 years with comprehensive correct Knowledge of HIV/AIDS (%) in 2006 was 32.9 per cent reporting betterment from 2001 (22.2%).
TARGET 8: Have halted by 2015 and begun to reverse the incidence of Malaria and other major diseases.
The Annual Parasite Incidence (API) rate – Malaria has consistently come down from 2.12 per thousand in 2001 to 0.72 per thousand in 2013, but slightly increased to 0.88 in 2014 (P) but confirmed deaths due to malaria in 2013 was 440 and in 2014 (P), 578 malaria deaths have been registered.
In India, Tuberculosis prevalence per lakh population has reduced from 465 in year 1990 to 211 in 2013. Tuberculosis Incidence per lakh population has reduced from 216 in year 1990 to 171 in 2013. Tuberculosis mortality per lakh population has reduced from 38 in year 1990 to 19 in 2013.
VIII.
GOAL
7:
ENSURING
ENVIRONMENTAL
SUSTAINABILITY TARGET 9: Integrate the principle of sustainable development into country policies and programmes and reverse the loss of environmental resources.
As per assessment in 2013, the total forest cover of the country was 697898 sq. km which is 21.23 per cent of the geographic
www.ijmer.in
60
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
area of the country. During 2011-2013, there was an increase of 5871 sq. km in forest cover.
The network of Protected Areas comprising 89 National Parks and 489 Sanctuaries giving a combined coverage of 155475.63 km2 in 2000, has grown steadily over the years. As of 2014, there are 692 Protected Areas (103 National Parks, 525 Wildlife Sanctuaries, four Community Reserves and 60 Conservation reserves, covering 158645.05 km2 or 5.07 per cent of the country's geographical area.
Per-capita Energy Consumption (PEC) (the ratio of the estimate of total energy consumption during the year to the estimated mid-year population of that year) increased from 6205.25 KWh in 2011-12 to 6748.61 KWh in 2012-13, thus, the percentage annual increase of 8.76 per cent.
In 2013, the estimated CO2 emission (Million Tonnes) for India is 1954.02. The Carbon dioxide emission showed a percentage increase of 235.57 per cent in 2014 over 1990 for India.
In 2010, consumption of CFC is estimated at 290.733 ODP tonnes (ODP –Ozone Depletion Potential), down from 5614 ODP tones in 2000. From the year 2000, the CFC consumption decreased steadily till 2008, but showed minor increase in 2010.
As per Census 2011, 67.3 per cent households are using solid fuels (fire wood / crop residue/cow dung cake/ coke, etc.) for cooking against 74.3 per cent in 2001. Census 2011 further reveals that, in rural areas 86.5per cent households, and in urban areas 26.1 per cent households, are using solid fuels for cooking.
www.ijmer.in
61
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
TARGET 10: Halve, by 2015 the proportion of people without sustainable access to safe drinking water and basic sanitation
During 2012, at all India level, 87.8 per cent households had access to improved source of drinking water while 86.9 per cent households in rural and 90.1 per cent households in urban area had access to improved source of drinking water. The target of halving the proportion of households without access to safe drinking water sources from its 1990 level to be reached by 2015, has already been achieved in rural areas and is likely to be achieved in urban areas. At all India level also, the target for access to improved source of drinking water has already been achieved.
The NSS 2012 revealed 43.4 per cent of households at all India level had no latrine facilities. The NSS 2012 shows that 59.4 per cent and 8.8 per cent households in rural India and urban India respectively had no access to sanitation. Towards achieving the target of access to basic sanitation facility in households, in urban areas, the 2015 target is likely to be met as the percentage of households without sanitation facility is likely to be 10.74 per cent in 2015 against the target of 14.18 per cent, and the progress is quite lagging behind in rural areas as likely achievement in 2015 is 60.96 per cent of households without sanitation facility vis-a- vis the target of 46.77 per cent. At all India level, 2015 target is unlikely to be met. The percentage of households without sanitation facility is likely to be 47.31 per cent vis –a –vis the target of 38.09 per cent.
TARGET
11:
By
2020,
to
have
achieved
a
significant
improvement in the lives of at least 100 million slum dwellers
Census 2011 reported that 17.2 per cent of urban households are located in slums. The percentage of slum households to urban
www.ijmer.in
62
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
households (slum reported towns) is 22.17 per cent. Census recorded a 37.14 per cent decadal growth in the number of slum households. Census further reveals that in 2011, 17.37 per cent of the urban population lives in slums. The percentage of population in slum households to urban households (slum reported towns) is 22.44 per cent. IX. GOAL 8: DEVELOPING A GLOBAL PARTNERSHIP FOR DEVELOPMENT Target 18: In co-operation with the private sector, make available
the
benefits
of
new
technologies,
especially
information and communication.
The overall tele-density in the country has shown tremendous progress and is at 76 per cent as on 31st July 2014.
The internet subscribers per 100 population accessing internet through wireline and wireless connections has increased from 16.15 in June 2013 to 20.83 in June 2014.
X. SUMMARY OF INDIA’S PROGRESS TOWARDS ACHIEVING MDGS MDGs and Targets: Summary of Progress Achieved by India MDG 1: ERADICATE EXTREME POVERTY AND HUNGER Target 1
Halve, between 1990 and 2015, the proportion of people whose income is less than one dollar a day
On track
Target
Halve, between 1990 and 2015, the proportion of people who suffer
Slow or almost off-
2
from hunger
track
MDG 2: ACHIEVE UNIVERSAL PRIMARY EDUCATION
www.ijmer.in
63
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Ensure that, by 2015, children Target 3
everywhere, boys and girls alike, will be able to complete a full course
Moderately on-track
of primary schooling MDG 3: PROMOTE GENDER EQUALITY AND EMPOWER WOMEN
Target 4
Eliminate gender disparity in primary and secondary education, preferably by 2005, and in all levels of education no later than 2015
On track
MDG 4: REDUCE CHILD MORTALITY Target 5
Reduce by two-thirds, between 1990 and 2015, the Under-Five Mortality Rate
Moderately on track due to the sharp decline in recent years
MDG 5: IMPROVE MATERNAL HEALTH Target 6
Reduce by three-quarters, between 1990 and 2015, the maternal mortality ratio
Slow or off-track
MDG 6: COMBAT HIV/AIDS, MALARIA AND OTHER DISEASES
Target 7
Halve halted by 2015 and begun to reverse the spread of HIV/AIDS
On track as trend reversal in HIV prevalence has been achieved
Target 8
Have halted by 2015 and begun to reverse the incidence of malaria and
Moderately on track as trend reversal has
other major diseases
been achieved for Annual Parasite
www.ijmer.in
64
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Incidence of Malaria and for prevalence of Tuberculosis MDG 7: ENSURE ENVIRONMENTAL SUSTAINABILITY
Target 9
Target 10
Target 11
Integrate the principle of sustainable development into country policies and programmes and reverse the loss of environmental resources Halve, by 2015, the proportion of people without sustainable access to safe drinking water and basic sanitation By 2020, to have achieved a significant improvement in the lives of at least 100 million slum dwellers
Moderately on track
On track for the indicator of drinking water. However, slow for the indicator of sanitation The pattern not statistically discernible
MDG 8: DEVELOP A GLOBAL PARTNERSHIP FOR DEVELOPMENT In cooperation with the private Target 18
sector, make available the benefits of new technologies, especially information and communications
On track
Source: Millennium Development Goals, India Country Report 2015, Social Statistics Division, Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation, Government of India, pp.22.
www.ijmer.in
65
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
When we look at the MDG targets and its accomplishment status, adequate progress has been made by India towards realizing the MDGs. It is indeed a herculean task in a country like India which has lot of diversity dovetailed into its culture, geography and its people. Though significant progress has been made in various targets, there is a dire need to focus on reducing hunger and maternal mortality rate to build a better nation. ACRONYMS API
: Annual Parasite Incidence
ART
: Antiretroviral Therapy
BSS
: Behavioural Surveillance Survey
CFC
: Chloro Fluro Carbon
CO2
: Carbon Di Oxide
DISE
: Department of School Education and Literacy
GER
: Gross Enrolment Ratio
GPI
: Gender Parity Index
HIV/AIDS :
Human immunodeficiency virus infection / acquired immunodeficiency syndrome
IMR
: Infant Mortality Ratio
MDGs
: Millennium Development Goals
MMR
: Maternal Mortality Ratio
NER
: Net Enrolment Rate
NFHS
: National Family Health Survey
NSS
: National Sample Survey
ODA
: Official Development Assistance
www.ijmer.in
66
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
ODP
: Ozone Depletion Potential
PEC
: Per-capita Energy Consumption
PGR
: Poverty Gap Ratio
PHCR
: Poverty Head Count Ratio
SRS
: Sample Registration System
TB
: Tuberculosis
U5MR
: Under-Five Mortality Ratio
UN
: United Nations
References 1. Gandhi, M, K. (1941): Constructive Programme – Its Meaning and Place, Navjivan Publishing House, Ahmedabad. 2. Gandhi, M, K. (1954): Sarvodaya – The Welfare of All, Navjivan Publishing House, Ahmedabad. 3. Jagadish, B. (2015): Social Work Approach in Achieving Millennium Development Goals, Prateeksha Publications, Jaipur, India. 4. UN ESCAP. (2015): India and the MDGs, Towards a Sustainable Future for All, United Nations Economic and Social Commission for Asia and the Pacific, India. 5. UN. (2013): The Millennium Development Goals Report 2013, United Nations, New York. 6. UN. (2014): The Millennium Development Goals Report 2014, United Nations, New York. 7. UN. (2015): MDG Success Springboard for New Sustainable Development www.ijmer.in
Agenda
–
UN
Report,
The
Millennium 67
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Development Goals Report 2015, UN Department of Public Information, 6th July. 8. UN. (2015): The Millennium Development Goals Report, 2014, We Can End Poverty 2015, Millennium Development Goals, United Nations, New York. 9. UN. (2015): The Millennium Development Goals Report 2015, Time for Global Action for People and Planet, United Nations, New York. 10. UN. (2015): The Millennium Development Goals Report 2015, United Nations, New York.
www.ijmer.in
68
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
AFRICAN HISTORY Prof. N Kanakaratnam
Surya Raju Mattimalla
Head Dept. of History Archaeology & Culture Dravidian University, Kuppam Andhra Pradesh
Ph.D Research Scholar Dept. of History Archaeology & Culture Dravidian University, Kuppam Andhra Pradesh
As W.E.B.Du Bois sees it, in absolute states, slogans about African actuality and accessory celebrations of African cultural traditions activity as a powerful opiate, which serves to mystify the masses and deaden them to the austere realities of everyday life (W.E.B.Du Bois). And if African intellectuals, especially-Richard Leslie Hill and John Henrik Clarke administering in Africa was notable for its use of the abode of authenticity. Admitting W.E.B.Du Bois’s apropos about the brainy activity of such discourse, some admiral acquire commented agreeably on Richard’s writings on authenticity. Ethnophilosophy perpetuates myth of primitive unanimity. i Especially ambitious philosophers, are agreeable to certificate traditional belief systems instead of allurement harder questions about existing social and political conditions, he thinks they become complicit in this actual process. This endure point brings us to one of W.E.B.Du Bois’s a lot of conspicuous criticisms of cultural revivalism-his affirmation that it perpetuates a mistaken compassionate of philosophy. As we acquire seen, revivalists acquire that African aesthetics exists in the anatomy of a collective, benumbed worldview aggregate by aboriginal African peoples, and that the assignment of the abreast African philosopher is to certificate the bulk appearance of this worldview. W.E.B.Du Bois, along with abounding added African philosophers, agilely altar to this definition of the botheration with this use of the appellation philosophy can be apparent if it is assorted with www.ijmer.in
69
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
the way the appellation is acclimated in reference to the Western tradition. For example, if we allege of Greek philosophy, we are not apropos to the aggregate behavior of ethnic Greeks about the gods, nature, society, and so on. Rather, we are apropos to the plan of alone thinkers such as Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle. While these thinkers generally advised popular and able angle about key affairs in life, they did so from a critical perspective, and usually assured that such angle were flawed or at atomic in charge of improvement. To adduce the a lot of famous case, afterwards anxiously analytical accepted Athenian behavior about justice, piety, and education, Socrates assured that these beliefs were abounding with errors, and were not accessory to the wellbeing of individual Athenians or association as a whole. As any first-year philosophy student can acquaint you, this affectionate of analytical absorption is the hallmark of abstract thinking. The problems with the revivalist compassionate of philosophy should be bright in ablaze of these remarks. To ascertain aesthetics as a aggregate worldview is to abstruse the able acceptation of the term: Aesthetics is a analytical activity, not a acquiescent captivation of beliefs by either individuals or amusing groups. Added importantly, to suggest that Africa’s finest minds should be agreeable to document and admire able behavior does not advance to the delivery of an African philosophy. Instead, it amounts to an evasion of the affectionate of analytical cerebration that is actively bare to address the problems that abide aural African societies. What is needed is a accurate assay of the bureau in which able behavior might impede modernization, and the bureau in which they adeptness provide Authoritarian governments use slogans about African authenticity to divert attention from oppression. Genuine philosophy is a critical activity, not a passive holding of beliefs are useful resourcesii. African philosophers who acquire boarded on this activity of critical assay acquire assured that there are some austere conflicts between www.ijmer.in
70
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
able modes of anticipation and the accurate aspect of modernization. Admitting revivalist claims about the existence of accurate adeptness in African societies, we cannot avoid the glaring gap amid accurate development in the West and Africa, and this gap is due in allotment to able bureau of cerebration about the natural world. W.E.B.Du Bois provides an apprehensible annual of this botheration in his altercation of science and technology enable African cultures (W.E.B.Du Bois). Although traditional cultures developed abounding advantageous technologies pertaining to herbal therapeutics, aliment preservation, and the like, Bois argues that they did not advance a abysmal accurate compassionate of nature. Scientific assay involves analytical observation, acclimatized by experiment, in the adventure for allegorical theories apropos the causes of accustomed phenomena. In absorption to alleviative therapeutics, for example, such an adventure would absorb assay into the causes of ache and the actinic backdrop that cede assertive herbal treatments efficacious. Yet, there is little affirmation that such inquiries occurred in African cultures, and Bois argues that this was due in ample allotment to religious beliefs-more precisely, to the prevalence of spiritistic understandings of the accustomed worldiii. To acknowledgment to the case of medicine, enable cultures the onset of ache was about attributed to abnormal entities who were responding to amusing transgressions or some added inappropriate behavior. Likewise, the capability of herbal remedies was attributed to the benevolent activity of spirits. The blackmail posed by this affectionate of cerebration to the development of science is obvious to W.E.B.Du Bois : Science, he writes, is based on an abstruse understanding and bribery of the important angle of causality: that is, a abysmal acknowledgment of the causal interactions amid natural phenomena. But area this is affected with super naturalistic orientations [toward nature], science . . . hardly makes progress (W.E.B.Du Bois). In a blaze www.ijmer.in
71
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
of this assessment, Bois argues that accurate development in Africa will crave a cogent brake on the scope of able religious beliefs. Bois does not affirmation that traditional adoration acquire to be absolutely abandoned, but he does insist that religious behavior acquire to crop area they baffle with a Gap between scientific development in the West and in Africa should not be ignored. Scientific compassionate of nature the task, he says, is to achieve an able apprenticed amid the realms of science and religion, and to breed a new bookish attitude to the alien world uncluttered by superstition, mysticism, and added forms of irrationality (W.E.B.Du Bois). While Bois focuses on restricting the ambit of behavior in airy agency, Joel A. Rogers offers a more encompassing critique, arguing that superstition-defined as rationally bottomless accepting in entities of any sort (Joel A. Rogers)-must be eradicated from all spheres of thought. Joel A. Rogers ’s less appeasing appearance is based on his accepting that, so continued as superstition endures on a ample scale, the assignment of developing scientific thought habits in Africa will be hindered. In this regard, Joel A. Rogers chastises African leaders who accompanying alarm for accurate and technological development, while cloudburst libations to the ancestral spirits who, as he puts it, are declared to be aerial about and sipping august schnapps (Joel A. Rogers). Despite differences in the tenor of their corresponding critiques, Joel A. Rogers and Bois both altercate that able behavior in spiritual agency acquire to be decidedly adapted to board scientific development. It is important to recognize, however, that others have been beneath accommodating to acquire this claim. Albert George Washington Williams offers a noteworthy acknowledgment to Joel A. Rogers and Bois, arguing that the conflict they apperceive amid science and adoration is based on both theoretical and applied misunderstandings. Drawing on Robin Horton’s abundant discussed allusive plan on African religion and Western science, George Washington Williams suggests that the apparent conflict between adoration and science recedes already we admit that the two www.ijmer.in
72
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
enterprises are commutable attempts to actualize adjustment in a puzzling and sometimes anarchic world. Whereas science attempts to appoint adjustment on the accustomed ambiance in accordance with our interests in anticipation and control, religion, says George Washington Williams, is largely concerned with the amusing apple and addresses our charge to engender personal accord in forms of moral agency (George Washington Williams). In a blaze of these observations, George Washington Williams argues that religious accounts of the apple should be beheld not as an obstacle to the development of accurate thought, but as a alongside exercise of abstract abilities answering to adapted needs and interests (George Washington Williams). On a applied level, the history of accurate and technological development in the West provides added evidence that Africans charge not carelessness their religious behavior in adjustment to advance a accurate outlook. For George Washington Williams, the African behavior that Rayford W. Logan characterizes as superstitious are no added incompatible with accurate development than religious behavior that were widely held in the West at the access of the accurate age. Belief in saints was not adverse with abstruse development in the West, and accepting in witches charge not is incompatible with abstruse development in Africa. . . . Nor was the development of a accurate apple appearance accidental on the bounce of religious beliefs. Neither Galileo nor Newton questioned the supernatural agency of Christ. Jesus absolved on baptize and witches fly, as Sogolo wryly put it, and neither accepting is necessarily an impediment to abstruse development. (George Washington Williams) George Washington Williams’s accent on the adapted yet commutual functions of science and adoration acquire to absolutely be taken into account in assessing the catechism of whether a battle exists between African adoration and the adventure for accurate development. Indeed, George Washington Williams’s altercation echoes Carter G. Woodson ’s own frequently acclimated metaphor of rendering unto Caesar what is Caesar’s and God what is www.ijmer.in
73
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
God’s, which suggests the achievability not alone of battle but of reconciliation amid the two enterprises (Carter G. Woodson). It should be noted, however, that the abeyant for accommodation envisioned by Carter G. Woodson is amid science and spiritual life, broadly construed, not amid science and forms of religious belief that centermost on what he calls agentive causation (Carter G. Woodson). On the contrary, Carter G. Woodson afresh laments the ubiquitous role of agentive agent in African life, absolutely because it impedes the development of accurate explanations that facilitate the goals of anticipation and control of the botheration is that these accurate and arresting religious behavior are durably affected in Caesar’s domain. In this regard, I would advance that George Washington Williams’s use of Horton’s plan to criticize Carter G. Woodson is somewhat misplaced. While Horton attempts to allay some accepted misconceptions by highlighting the alongside abstract functions of adoration and science, he emphasizes the role that African adoration plays in understanding the accustomed rather than the amusing apple and argues that airy armament play the above role in religious explanations that material causes play in accurate explanations of the above phenomena (George Washington Williams). For these reasons, I accept George Washington Williams’s acknowledgment to Carter G. Woodson and Bois has apprenticed value. He is absolutely actual to point out that belief in abnormal beings is accordant with an accurate outlook, and to these admeasurements. I would accede that Rayford W. Logan ’s affair about the deleterious furnishings of cloudburst libations to affiliated alcohol is overstated. But if accepting in abnormal beings plays an able-bodied role in one’s causal explanations of the accustomed world, it is harder to avoid the cessation that adoration is interfering with the development of scientific understanding. The development of accurate anticipation habits in Africa would thus arise to crave alteration at atomic some arresting religious beliefs www.ijmer.in
74
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
apropos airy agency. And, adverse to the claims of cultural revivalists, this does not aggregate an alarm for Africans to carelessness their aboriginal traditions in favor of European or Western cultural norms, two credibility acquire to be emphasized here. First, there is annihilation accurately Western about the accurate understanding of nature. While science may be added developed in the West, this should be beheld as a bulk of actual circumstances, not a assurance of some abysmal aberration amid the Western and African minds (Rayford W. Logan). Accurate cerebration is a basic human capacity, one which holds important allowances for persons regardless of their cultural setting. As Carter G. Woodson indicates the lack of analytical accurate assay bantam the advance of important technologies in African societies to adduce the a lot of accessible example, the abridgement of science-based anesthetic led to austere problems for the accurate assay of diseases and the administering of proper medicinal dosages. Unfortunately, in abreast Africa this is still a botheration that needs to be addressed. In some locales, persons are adversity and dying from treatable diseases because so-called Western alleviative methods are alone in favor of traditional methods, such as the use of a diviner to analyze awful spirits. In Carter G. Woodson’s view, such attitudes and practices are artlessly tragic, and should not be beheld as signs of African authenticity. In reality, he says, they belie the humanistic aspect of African culture (Carter G. Woodson). The added point about science and Westernization is this: When thinkers like Carter G. Woodson and Rayford W. Logan alarm for accurate development in Africa, they are not suggesting that Africans should simply mimic Western forms of science and technology. Africans can it should be acclaimed that behavior in agentive agent by no bureau aggregate the whole or even the bulk of able African religion. Rayford W. Logan argues that amongst the James W. C. Pennington and the William Wells Brown the www.ijmer.in
75
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
bulk of adoration is accepting in the adeptness and accomplishment of an alone all-powerful being, and that the accepting in bottom alcohol is not even appropriately classified as religious. See Rayford W. Logan . There is nothing specifically Western about the scientific understanding of nature surely apprentice from accurate developments in Europe and elsewhere, but their own accurate plan should be geared to the specific needs of African societies. Thus, Carter G. Woodson argues that an accent on research and technologies accompanying to aliment and agriculture, bloom and housing, and the like would be added adapted than investing in avant-garde aggressive technologies or amplitude assay (Carter G. Woodson). Admitting an advantage of address about the charge for globalization, the following of advice and media technologies would as well assume to be beneath burning than technologies that address basic animal needsiv. Let me about-face now to the catechism of political modernization. Democracy has acutely not flourished in abundant of postcolonial Africa, and there is ample agitation about both the causes of this problem and the ambit of applicable solutions. For our purposes, the most important focus of agitation is the admeasurements to which pre-colonial African societies included autonomous features, and the admeasurements to which able political annual are accordant to the claiming of democratization. Of accurate affair is the appliance of traditional communalism, a access of amusing alignment which emphasizes solidarity based on aggregate interests, and the abstraction that individual activities should be geared adjoin the accepted good. The ensuing discussion will focus on the catechism of whether able communalism provides an applicable base for cerebration about capitalism in the abreast context. Although Carter G. Woodson is conceivably a bit brassy if he declares that “defining the abstraction of capitalism is not difficult,” I would agree with his affirmation that democracy, at it’s a lot of basal level, involves two related attack www.ijmer.in
76
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
(Carter G. Woodson). First, autonomous governance must be representative-that is, it acquires to cover institutions that acquiesce for the will of the humans to be bidding in political decision-making. Second, 18-carat capitalism acquires to cover institutions that ensure basal rights and amends for all associates of a society, so that accepted aphorism does not base into a tyranny of the majority. In Western countries, the adumbrative aspect of democracy is bidding through practices such as alternate elections, whereas the moral aspect is addressed by built-in and legal protections. In contrast, pre-colonial African societies were often disqualified by ancestral chiefs, and lacked academic constitutions ensuring things such as the rights to “life, alternative and the pursuit of happiness.” But they, too, had autonomous features, which were scientific development in Africa need not simply mimic Western forms expressed through an array of institutions administering political authority and political decisionmaking. For example, in James W. C. Pennington societies chiefs were not called through simple ancestral succession, but through balloter activity in which association leaders examined the administration qualities of candidates and consulted with their respective constituencies. Already the arch ascended to the throne, he did not aphorism by absolute fiat, but through abutting consultation with a board of advisers, afresh absolute association leaders. If the chief became too autocratic, the humans had the adeptness to depose or destool him through their advising councils. Thus, adverse to a accepted misconception, aphorism by chiefs did not betoken that pre-colonial societies were fundamentally absolute (Carter G. Woodson ).v It is as well important to admit that these societies included institutions that accustomed associates of the association to allege and air grievances afore the arch and his councilors. Conceivably the most noteworthy academy was the palaver, an altercation appointment that was acclimated to boldness disagreements. It is generally acclaimed www.ijmer.in
77
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
that already a palaver was convened the participants talked until they agreed which generally took a ample bulk of time. This is because the ambition of the affair was not artlessly to adeptness a majority decision, but to adeptness a consensus-that is, an accommodation that reflected the views of all participants. As Carter G. Woodson credibility out, the following of this kind of acceding adapted patience, alternate tolerance, and an attitude of compromise (Carter G. Woodson). Participants had to be willing to adapt and conceivably even carelessness their positions in the face of more actuating arguments. In pre-colonial societies the adventure for consensus did not consistently aftereffect in accepted agreement, but it did accord anybody a absolute and fair audition and, as far as possible, it accustomed everyone’s appearance to be reflected in decisions of the group. Of course, it is one bulk to adduce the actuality of democratic institutions in pre-colonial Africa, and addition to appearance how these institutions adeptness be accordant for abreast African societies. Some aspects of pre-colonial governance, such as aphorism by hereditary chiefs, would absolutely not be able in the accepted context. But other annual arise to be added promising. For example, Carter G. Woodson argues that the accent on aggregate needs enable communal societies provides the base for an added absolute understanding of democracy, which emphasizes not just political rights but a Pre-colonial African governments had democratic features. Broader ambit of amusing and bread-and-butter rights than one finds guaranteed in Western societies. Forth agnate lines, Rayford W. Logan argues that able annual about accord and political organization provides the base for developing what he calls consensual democracies. These democracies would be characterized by localized decision-making bodies, civic advising councils, and deliberative processes geared adjoin accomplishing accord rather than simple majority decisions. Although Rayford W. Logan recognizes that there are cogent disagreements amid groups in today’s African societies, he argues that such disagreements charge not advance into a multiparty political system, which enshrines www.ijmer.in
78
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
abiding oppositions and, all too often, ensures a boyhood whose articulation is not adequately heard. Instead, he argues for the conception of a nonparty polity, based on a faculty of aggregate interests and solidarity, and committed to the consensual ideal of acceding austere consideration to the perspectives of all bodies if disagreements arise (Rayford W. Logan).While the activity of developing a communalist understanding of capitalism has been avidly pursued by a cogent accumulation of African philosophers, this activity has as well been accountable to some serious criticisms. The a lot of cogent altercation highlights glaring differences amid pre-colonial and abreast Africa, which seem to attenuate the achievability of an abreast democracy based on communalist principles. As William Wells Brown credibility out, pre-colonial communalism prevailed in baby societies with non money economies, in which associates were apprenticed calm by common claret and animosity of continued family hood. Such societies were as well characterized by abundant acceding apropos customs, morality, and religious beliefs, which accumulated to board a sense of adherence and, indeed, aggregate afterlife amidst the people. In contrast, todays abundant beyond African societies are characterized by accretion urbanization, and by cogent ethnic, religious, and class differences aural their populations. And, of course, they feature money economies angry in capricious degrees to apple markets. References i
Tradition and Modernity in Postcolonial African Philosophy https://www.questia.com/.../tradition-and-modernity-in-postcolonial-afric... (accessed on 24 September 2015) ii Ibid iii Ibid iv Ibid v Ibid
www.ijmer.in
at
79
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
ANCIENT TRIBAL AND NAGA VILLAGE- SOME REFLECTIONS Dr. Akram Ali Bhutto Assistant Professor Department of Political Science Indira Gandhi College, Boitamari Bongaigaon, Assam, India The present scenario of the tribal people is that they live in the villages. The concept of village as the administrative social, cultural and development unit is built into the traditional polity. The tribal people of Manipur, both the Nagas and the Kuki-Chins had developed their own polity.1 However their polity did not grow beyond their native village. They did not develop into tribe-level polity formation. Therefore, the village is the autonomous political, social economic and cultural unit.2 The political life of the tribal people of India reflects a paradoxical situation in which democracy and monarchy co-exist. Every head of a community at different levels like clan, village and territory is generally honored, obeyed and accepted as the head of the group. His office is hereditary. The supreme band final authority is in the hands of a single person. Every tribal has a share in the political ties of the village and the region. It exists for the majority; it is born of it and embodies it. The tribal leader governs the community only because he is backed by the majority or the whole of the group.3 There are two kinds of polity. Among the Nagas, there is a sort of democratic type of political system, which was described by the colonial writers as “small republic”. Among the Kuki-Chin, the chieftainship is the main political system. The rules of Manipur recognized this traditional polity during the pre-colonial period. During the British rule, the laws of Manipur diluted the traditional polity but the people themselves still continue to profess their custom and traditions, which form the core of their polity. The traditional polity www.ijmer.in
80
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
has a clear cut boundary of the village, there was a well regulated land ownership system, a judicial system and other social institutions based on customary laws. The land ownership includes the community land, clan land and individual land among the Nagas. There is the chief ownership of land among the Kuki-Chins. The traditional polity has eroded due to the Indian legislation relating to forest and revenue and with the emergence of private property in the tribal society. The tribal customary laws are very powerful guiding principles in the perpetuation of the polity in the tribal villagers.4 But it is found that there are chieftainships amongst the Nagas also though it might not be as well-defined as that of the Kuki-Chin. Naga village state is an independent unit and accordingly enjoys the right of sovereignty. Every village state pursues an independent foreign policy and implements its own customary laws on all walks if its citizens. Every village state has its own defense system. Administration is indigenous and independent.5 Every village possesses a well-defined area of territory, not only of wet cultivated land, but of jhum and waste land as well. The boundary lines can be ascertained with either natural or with stones to indicate the actual line of control.6 Naga society found in the village is a compact and well-knit society where rigid customs and disciplines are observed. Any violation of these brought heavy punishment. The laws of the land are not only to be respected but also to be feared. As the village is an independent unit, the customary laws are supreme and dispensation of punishment is quick.7 Each village is run by its village council composed of various members with the headman or the chief at the supreme position. Some Naga tribes prefer to call the chief as Ningthou (King). These are many
www.ijmer.in
81
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
criteria on which chieftainship is claimed and the basis on which the council members are selected. Chieftainship is an important factor in the Naga polity. Every tribe has a chief who is the head of the village. In the normal course, the leader of the first settlement would become chief. According to tradition and custom, the chief is required to obtain the sanction of goods to acquire the position of a chief, by carrying out prescribed test and ordeals.8 Traditionally the Ruangmei people considered the one who first settled in the village as chief. It was he who performed the ceremony for settlement in the new village. According to the traditional songs, a married man who desired to find his own village would do so by organizing helper under him in tracing new land unoccupied by others. If he could find the land he was considered as chief (Nampou) by the villagers. And if a group of persons went in search of a land for village, the chief had to be chosen from among them by observing omens.9 But the divine method of choosing the chief was performed by means of finding whose cock crowed first. Each person could sleep with a cock kept in the cage beside him. If the cock of a particular person started crow first the owner of the cock was considered as chief.10 The chief would erect the village ‘gate’ (Raengh). There would be two gates for the village which the chief would own both or one but sometimes another person or headman would also own another gate if it fell on his own private land. In order to please the God, the owner of this gate would first dig out pit and offer wine, egg, ginger and so on to the God. Whether he owned one or both the gates the chief identified himself before the villagers that he owned the village, as such he was to be taken as the real master of the land. But a community level the emergence of chieftainship was differently considered. Accordingly to V. V. Rao, a scholar of regional studies, and the chieftainship originated in www.ijmer.in
82
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
the physical; and intellectual power of any person. In other words, any person who had the ability to organize a force could become a chief.11 Every Raungmei village was ruled by its own chief called Nampou (Khullak). The chief was given a prominent position at all social and religions gathering and festivals of the village. The words of the chief were obeyed respectfully and promptly.12 He was considered as the leader in war, the owner of the village land and protector of the village.13 He was entitled to a portion of the meat of all animals killed in the village during the festivals. The youths of the village helped him in cultivating his fields, and in the construction of his house. He was always offered the best rice beer (Zou-Ngao) during the festivals.14 The Ruangmei tribe recognized a hereditary tradition of chieftainship.15 According to R. Brown, “Every village has three hereditary officers, namely, Khullakpa, Luplakpa and Lampu, any officers besides these are elected.”16 Chieftainship was hereditary in most of the Naga tribes except for some other tribes like AO and Lotha tribes of Nagaland.17 Accordingly, in Naga village the chief enjoyed enormous powers as he was considered as the supreme authority in almost all affairs of the village. He was responsible for administration of his village and for the welfare of the villagers. The chief of the village executed all legal functions and exercised his power as the highest authority in the village. In traditional society, no written documents were required but his verbal declaration based on customary laws was taken as final. Thus, the chief settled the villagers and village disputes. He settled the disputes according to traditional customary laws. Even in some village the chief had a dual function as religious as religious and secular head of the village. As the religious head, the chief was the first man to sow seeds, the first to plant and the first to harvest and many more. Although the religious worship and sacrifices were performed by the priest, yet his presence was taken as essential.
www.ijmer.in
83
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Here it is striking to note that there was no legal provision for removal of the chief of the village as there was no tenure in the traditional system. Of course, the position of the chief can be shifted if and only if he lost his ability, i.e. both mentally and physical unable to run the village, otherwise not. A village council composed of the elders of the village assisted the chief of the village. The administration of justice, enforcement of executive function, maintenance of social practices and customary laws and religious rites were the areas under the institution of powerful chief. The village council called peikai is the highest decision making body and seat of authority of the village. It consists of devoted elders and is chaired by the elder who host the pei. He is called peipouc. The pei is also the village court. There is no matter that cannot deal with by the pei. The decision of the pei is all binding and also is honored by the state authority or government. The decision and practices of the pei become the customary laws or precedence to be followed. The power and function of the village council could be broadly divided into executive, legislative and judicial. The village council was the most powerful executive body in the village administration. The decision of the council on all important matters was last and final. Since the council members were the sole authority to enforce customary law and amend the unwritten customary laws which they followed. The council members commanded villagers in their village jurisdiction, executed orders, took action against any village for violation of order. The council; was responsible for maintaining peace, harmony and unity as well as equality of the village. Thus, administration of the village was carried out by the village council. In case a person failed to abide by the decisions of the council, the council had take necessary action against the person concerned as there were innumerable taboos in Naga society. Apart from these, the village council also dealt with the financial matters within the village. Rents of a village were to be paid in kinds, www.ijmer.in
84
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
by collecting paddy from every household. Paddy in lieu of money or money in lieu of services was to be collected from the villagers. Again, any fine imposed on an individual was to be reserved for the council’s fund, not otherwise. However, the village council was not taken authority of religious rites and rituals, but it had certain rights in this field too. The religious head of the village was the village priest and elders of the village constituted the council. The priest always consulted the village council on matters of religious festivals and thereby performed all the traditional rites and rituals. The council enforced the villagers to maintain strict observation about taboo. This makes the sense to say that the council being the general body framed laws and customary rules and regulations from time to time. Such rules and regulations were made when all the villagers attended the council in full strength. For example, the council could adopt new laws concerning marriage, theft, property and lands to meet the demand of time and situation. Indeed, there was no capital punishment as such. The hardest punishment was imposition of fines and banishment of individual from the village. Thus, village council was the single court of justice and heard cases and disputes and passed verdicts. This is all about how the ancient tribes and Naga village runs via the traditional rules and principles advocated by the chief of a particular village. References: 1
Kamei, G. Ethnicity and Social Changes: An Anthology of Essays, Akansha Publishing House, New Delhi, 2008, p. 190. 2 Ibid, p. 174. 3 Vidyarthi, L. P. and Rai, B. K. The Tribal Culture of India, Concept Publishing Company, New Delhi, 1985, p. 195. 4 Ibid, p. 175. 5 Shimray, R. R. Origin and Culture of Nagas, Aruna Printing press, New Delhi, 1985, p. 45. 6 James, R. K. The Poumai Naga, Tribe of Manipuri : A socio Political Study, Unpublished M. Phil dissertation submitted to Manipur University, 1990, p. 41.
www.ijmer.in
85
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
7
Shimray, R. R. Origin and Culture of Nagas, op cit., p. 44. Fr. Jose, Pd. Traditional Administrative System and Customary Laws of the Maram Tribe, Unpublished Ph. D. Thesis, submitted to Manipur University, 2008, p. 143. 9 Golmei, A. The Zeliangrong Nagas in Manipur: A Socio-Political study, Unpublished Thesis, Manipur university, 2004, p. 136. 10 Ibid. 11 Rao, V. V. A Century of Tribal Politics in North-East India, 1874-1974, n. p., New Delhi, 1976, p. 108. 12 Vidyarthi, L. P. and Rai, B. K. The Tribal Culture of India, op cit., p. 31. 13 Perry, N. E. The Lakhers, n. p. New Delhi, 1998, p. 248. 14 Rao, V. V. A Century of Tribal Politics in North-East India, 1874-1974, op cit., p.118. 15 Bareh, H. Gazetter of India, Nagaland, Kohima District, Nagaland, 1970, p. 186. 16 Brown, R. Statistical Account of Manipur, n. p., Calcutta, 1973, p. 24. 17 Shimray, R. R. Origin and Culture of Nagas, op cit., p. 52. 8
www.ijmer.in
86
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
AN IMPACT OF MICRO CREDIT ON WOMEN PARTICIPATING IN SELF HELP GROUP M. RajaRajeswari
Dr. S. Sethurajan
Assistant Professor Dept. of B.Com(e-Commerce) PSGR Krishnammal College for Women Peelamedu, Coimbatore
Associate Professor of Commerce Thavathiru Santhalinga Adigal Ariviyal Tamil Kaloori Coimbatore
INTRODUCTION Micro-credit intervention programme has been well-recognized world over as an effective tool for poverty alleviation and improving economic conditions of poor. In India too, micro-credit is making a strong headway in its efforts to reduce poverty and empower the rural poor. The micro-credit system provides for organisation of SHGs consisting of members with homogeneous economic interests. People with limited means join together as an informal group, approach the bank to raise loans individually and the security for the loans is given in the form of a collective guarantee. Self Help Group (SHGs)-Bank Linkage Programme is emerging as a cost effective mechanism for providing financial services to the “Unreached Poor” which has been successful not only in meeting financial needs of the rural poor women but also strengthen collective self help capacities of the poor, leading to their empowerment. The banks are assured of getting back their principal amount with interest since the borrowed funds are being used for undertaking some small economic ventures. The borrowed money is never used extravagantly and so the repayment capacity of the borrowers increases. The success of such micro-credit depends largely on the borrowers economic upliftment.
www.ijmer.in
87
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
REVIEW OF LITERATURE Rekha
Goankar(2001)in her study concluded that the
movement of SHGs can significantly contribute towards the reduction of poverty and unemployment in the rural sector of the economy and the SHGs can lead to social transformation in terms of economic development and the social change. Naila kabeer (2005) in a study apparently concludes that while access to financial services can and does make important contributions to the economic productivity and social wellbeing of poor women and their households, it does not “automatically” empower women – any more than do education, political quotas, access to waged work or any of the other interventions. STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM Several studies indicate that self-help group programmes often in the form of credit or micro credit schemes and savings have succeeded in changing the lives of poor women by making way for enhanced income and increased self-esteem. This is evident from the mushrooming growth of self- help groups in the state. A Saying by a NGO Worker depicts the present situation: “Nobody could get bank loan without a middleman earlier. Half the loan would be eaten up because of the corruption. Today the bankers treat the women with respect and give them loans.” Hence in this perspective this study is undertaken to analyse the demographic profile and assess the impact of micro credit on the selected Self Help Group members of Coimbatore district, Tamilnadu. OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY
To study the demographic profile of Selected Self Help Group Members
www.ijmer.in
88
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
To assess the impact of microcredit of selected Self Help Group Members
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY The study is undertaken in Coimbatore district. The primary data is collected through structured interview schedule. The size of the sample for the study is 300 women Self-help group members applying simple random sampling technique. TOOLS USED
Simple Percentage Analysis
Descriptive Analysis
ANOVA
DEMOGRAPHIC
PROFILE
OF
SELF
HELP
GROUP
MEMBERS Demographic profile of the selected 300 Self-help group members have been presented in the below table based on percentage analysis. The profile is sub classified as general and group profile. DEMOGRAPHIC PROFILE OF RESPONDENTS Sl.No.
Particulars
GENERAL PROFILE 1 Age Group Less than 25 26-30 31-35 >40 2 Educational status Illiterate Primary Level High School Higher Secondary
www.ijmer.in
No. of Respondents
%
51 92 84 73
17.00 30.67 28.00 24.33
23 142 47 48
7.67 47.33 15.67 16.00
89
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Graduates Monthly Income 1000-5000 5001-10000 Above 10000 GROUP PROFILE 4 Position in the Group Animator Representative-I Member 5 No. of years in the Group Less than 2 years 2-5 years Above 5 years 6 Number of Loans taken One 2 to 4 More than 4 7 Size of latest loan taken Less than Rs.5000 Rs.5000-10000 Rs.10000-15000 Rs.15000-20000 Above Rs.20000
40
13.33
62 157 81
20.67 52.33 27.00
78 114 108
26.00 38.00 36.00
84 111 105
28.00 37.00 35.00
81 189 30
27.00 63.00 10.00
19 92 49 27 113
6.33 30.67 16.33 9.00 37.67
3
Source: Primary data The above table describes the demographic profile of the respondents. 30.67% are in the age group of 26 to 30 years, 47.33% of the total members have completed their primary education, 52.33% have monthly income of 5001 to 10000, 38% of the respondents are in representative-I position in the group, 37% have 2 to 5 years of experience in the group, 63% of the respondents have taken 2 to 4 loans and 37.67% have taken loan above Rs. 20,000. IMPACT OF MICRO CREDIT Descriptive analysis has been used to find the mean scores for the impact of micro credit. The impact of the microcredit is measured by 11 items at five point scale given by the respondents. www.ijmer.in
90
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
DESCRIPTIVE ANALYSIS ON IMPACT OF MICRO CREDIT Impact of N Minimum Microcredit Increase in Income 184 1.00 Level Progress in Business 184 1.00 Activities Enhanced Savings 184 1.00 Increased 184 1.00 Expenditure Change in Life Style 184 1.00 Social Status 184 1.00 upliftment Increased house hold 184 1.00 assets Skill development 184 1.00 Confidence building 184 1.00 Bank linkages 184 1.00 Participation in 184 1.00 decision making Impact of micro 184 11.00 credit Source: Calculated Data
Maximum Mean 5.00
4.6630
Std. Deviation .5387
5.00
4.3043
.6733
5.00 5.00
3.9728 4.3750
.9775 .6576
5.00 5.00
4.2772 4.2174
.8897 .8599
5.00
4.2391
.7944
5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
4.3152 4.2500 4.1793 3.9565
.6844 .8380 .9086 1.0546
55.00
46.75
6.8411
The above table describes average score for impact of micro credit. The members have given highest mean score for Improvement in Income Level and least score for confidence building. The total average mean score for impact of microcredit is 46.75. It is clear that the impact of microcredit had a positive impact on the respondents. ANOVA One way ANOVA have been applied to find significant difference between the independent variables of general and group profile such as age, education, monthly income, position in the group, No. of years in the group, No. of loans taken and Size of the latest loan taken with impact of micro credit. www.ijmer.in
91
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
A) GENERAL PROFILE AND IMPACT OF MICRO CREDIT H0: There is no significant difference between general profile of the members and impact of micro credit. ANOVA-GENERAL PROFILE AND IMPACT OF MICRO CREDIT General profile Age
Between Groups Within Groups Total Education Between Groups Within Groups Total Monthly Between Income Groups Within Groups Total Source: Calculated Data
Sum of df Squares 249.598 3
Mean Square 83.199
8314.902
180
46.194
8564.500 419.478
183 5
83.896
8145.022
178
45.759
8664.500 21.478
183 2
10.739
8543.022
181
47.199
8564.500
183
F
Sig.
1.801
Ns
1.833
Ns
.228
Ns
The above table depicts the results of ANOVA with the significant value of 5% and 1% level of significance. The hypothesis has been accepted in the case of age, education and monthly income indicating that the general profile of members with the impact of micro credit do not vary significantly. B) GROUP PROFILE AND IMPACT OF MICRO CREDIT H0: There is no significant difference between group profile of the members and impact of micro credit.
www.ijmer.in
92
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
ANOVA-GROUP PROFILE AND IMPACT OF MICRO CREDIT Group Profile Position in the Group
df
Between Groups Within Groups Total
Sum of Squares 299.351 8265.149 8564.500
No. of years in the Group
Between Groups Within Groups Total
522.220 8042.280 8564.500
Number of Loans taken
Between Groups Within Groups Total
Size of latest loan taken
Between Groups Within Groups Total
Source: Calculated Data
Mean Square 74.838 46.174
F
Sig.
1.621
Ns
4 179 189
130.555 44.929
2.903
*
686.247 7878.253 8564.500
2 181 183
343.123 43.526
7.883
**
251.180 8313.320 8564.500
4 179 183
62.795 46.443
1.352
Ns
4 179 183
*Significant at 0.05 level
** significant at 0.01 level. The above table has shown the results of ANOVA. The hypothesis has been accepted in the case of position in the group and size of latest loan taken, indicating that the above facts and impact of micro credit do not vary significantly. For Number of loans taken and Number of years in the group differ significantly in respect of impact of micro credit. Hence the hypothesis is rejected for those factors. FINDINGS AND SUGGESTIONS
After joining self help groups the members are aware of loan facilities and had availed loan for their development.
Impact of micro credit on the respondents was maximum in increase in income level.
www.ijmer.in
93
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Analyzing the General profile of the respondents with impact of micro credit it shown that the factors considered had no significant difference to impact of micro credit
Analyzing the Group profile, Position in the Group, Size of latest loan taken had no significant difference to impact of micro credit and other two factors i.e., No. of years in the Group, Number of Loans taken showed significant difference.
CONCLUSION The microcredit programmes aim to provide support to the members to strengthen and sensitize members on their economic issues. The Government and non-Government organizations should take necessary steps to ensure the effectiveness of micro credit programmes. Effective and efficient micro credit programmes are the essential ingredients to gear the members economical status. The study shows that the main reason for joining SHG is not be merely to get just credit, it in an empowerment process After joining the self help group the women are economically and socially empowered.. This empowerment cannot be transformed or delivered it must be self generated such that it enables those who are empowered to take control over their lives. References 1. Karl, M.(1995). Women and Empowerment: Participation and Decision Making. 2. Women and World Development Series. United Nations. New York, NY. 3. M.Anjugam and C. Ramasamy (2007) „Determinants of Women‟s participation in 4. Self-Help Group led micro finance programme in TamilNadu. Agricultural Economics Research Review, 2007, vol. 20, issue 2 www.ijmer.in
94
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
5. Naila kabeer(2005) “Is Micro Finance a‟ Magic Bullet‟ for Womens Empowerment? 6. Analysis of Findings from South Asia “Economic and Political Weekly October 29, 2005 7. Progress of SHG--Bank linkage in India 2003-2004, NABARAD 8. Rekha, R . Gaonkar., (2001), “Working and impact of Self help groups in Goa ”, 9. Indian Journal of Agricultural Economics, Vol.56, No.3, p .465.
www.ijmer.in
95
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
EFFECT OF ADJUSTMENT ON THE ACADEMIC PERFORMANCE OF URDU MEDIUM MALE AND FEMALE SECONDARY LEVEL STUDENTS Dr. Mohd. Moshahid Associate Professor Department of Education & Training Maulana Azad National Urdu University Hyderabad Education is a powerful instrument to bring about desired change in the individual as well as in the society. These changes are in terms of more physical and mental abilities, development of certain skills peculiar to each subject and better adjustment to the given situation or environment. Moreover, education helps in the preservation and promotion of socio-cultural heritage for the betterment of the human beings and the society in which they live. It inculcates logical thinking and develops scientific skills among the individuals to cope intelligently with their environment and to contribute to their own well-being and that of society. Academic performance has become an index of child’s future in this highly competitive world. As a result, the students going to schools and colleges attempt for attaining high achievement. The effectiveness of any educational system to a large extent depends upon the involvement of students to achieve whatever it is to be in the cognitive or psycho-motor domain. Good (1973) defines school (academic) achievement as, ‘The knowledge attained or skills developed in the school subjects, usually designated by test scores or marks assigned by teachers, or the both’. Hawes (1982) described academic achievement as ‘successful accomplishment or performance in particular subjects, areas or courses, usually by reasons of skill, hard work and interest; typically summarized in various types of grades, marks, scores or descriptive commentary’. www.ijmer.in
96
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
In the present society academic achievement is considered as a key criterion to judge one’s total potentialities and capacities. Hence, academic achievement occupies a very important place in education as well as in the learning process. The student who cannot keep up academically is likely to find his school experiences frustrating, unrewarding and in a significant number of instances humiliating (Mussen et al., 1974). Academic performance is a function of a set of variables. It shows the extent to which students are able to attain the predefined instructional objectives. In order to achieve the stipulated objectives learning experiences are provided in the classroom. There are many cognitive and non-cognitive factors such as intelligence, personality, creativity, socio-economic status, adjustment, study habits, social acceptance, and level of aspiration, motivation, achievement motivation, opportunities, education and training and gender which influences the learning of a student (Conger and Peterson, 1984). The concept of adjustment is as old as human race on the earth. The systematic emergence of this concept starts from Darwin’s (1859) Theory of Evolution. Psychologists have interpreted adjustment from two important points of views; one adjustment as an achievement and another adjustment as a process. The first point of view emphasizes the quality or efficiency of an individual where he can perform his duties in different circumstances and the second lays emphasis on the process on by which an individual adjusts in his external environment. The term adjustment refers to a harmonious relationship between the individual and the environment. Coleman (1960) states, ‘The process by which an organism attempts to meet the demands placed upon it by its own nature and by its environment is called adjustment’. Good (1973), in the dictionary of education, held that adjustment as the psychological process, it is process of finding and adopting modes of behavior suitable to the environment or to changes; the favorable, neutral or unfavorable www.ijmer.in
97
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
adaptation of an organism to internal and external stimulus. According to Hurlock (2003), the term adjustment refers to the extent to which an individual’s personality functions efficiently in the world of people. It is clear from the above discussion that the adjustment process is multidimensional. The studies which taken into consideration the adjustment as the variable to see the effect on the academic performance like Aggrawal (1998) revealed that adjustment significantly affect the academic achievement of the students. Vashishtha (1989) found that well adjusted students demonstrated a high academic achievement which maladjusted ones lacked in academic achievement. Ahmad & Raheem (2003) revealed that the adjustment have contributed significantly to the academic achievement. Gurubasappa (2005) found that there exists a significant positive high correlation between academic achievement and adjustment. Nalini and Bhatta (2009) concluded that the interaction effect of school adjustment on achievement of the students was significant. Osaedoh & Iyamu (2012) revealed that the social life adjustment influences students’ academic achievement. Shah and Sharma (2012) found that there is a significant difference existed between adjustments of the three groups i.e. low, high and average levels of academic achievement. The above mentioned studies clearly show that adjustment level of the students influences their academic performance. Therefore, it is pertinent to study the effect of adjustment on the academic performance of the students because the secondary level student faces different problems at home, school and society at large. Hence, the investigator decided to study the present problem. Objectives of the Study 1.
To find out the relationship of adjustment with the academic performance for the Urdu medium male and
www.ijmer.in
98
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
female secondary level students. 2.
To compare the academic performance of Urdu medium male and female secondary level students on the basis of adjustment.
Hypotheses H.01: There will be no significant relationship of adjustment with the academic performance for the Urdu medium male and female secondary level students. H.02: There will be no significant difference in the academic performance of Urdu medium male and female secondary level students on the basis of adjustment. Methodology Sample Sample of the present study consisted of 336 Urdu Medium secondary level students (143 male and 193 female) selected from fourteen schools (08 boys & 6 girls) of the district Hyderabad of A.P. by stratified random sampling procedure in such a way that Urdu and English medium students may get equal representation. Tools For the sake of data collection, the standardized tool “Adjustment Inventory for School Students (AISS)” prepared and standardized by Sinha and Singh was employed, and the students’ % of annual examination marks (Class IX) taken from the school records was considered as the measure of Academic Performance. Data Processing & Statistical Techniques Keeping in view the objectives of the study, the collected data were processed by computer using statistical software package SPSS
www.ijmer.in
99
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
(Statistical Package for Social Sciences). The main statistical technique used for the treatment of data includes Mean, Standard Deviation, ttest to see the significance of difference between two means and Pearson Product Moment correlation coefficient (r) to find out the correlations between the paired variables. Analysis and Interpretation As per the design of the study, the needed data are collected and subjected to statistical treatment to verify the stated hypotheses. The results of the Correlation between adjustment and the academic performance for the Urdu medium male and female respondents are presented in the Table 1 Table: 1 Correlation between Adjustment and the Academic Performance Urdu Medium Male Urdu Medium Female Students (N=143) Students (N=193) Adjustment
0.330***
0.467***
*** = P<0.001 From the table-1, it is clear that the coefficients of correlation between adjustment and academic performance are found to be 0.33 for the Urdu medium male students and 0.47 for the Urdu medium female students. The coefficients of correlation of adjustment with academic performance for both groups are found to be positive and significant. This indicates that the students who are well adjusted also have high academic performance. Thus, the hypothesis H.01: ‘There
will
be
no
significant
relationship of adjustment with the academic performance for the Urdu medium male and female secondary level students’, is rejected
www.ijmer.in
100
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Table: 2 Significance of Difference in the Mean Academic Performance Scores of Highly Adjusted Male and Highly Adjusted Female Students Groups
N
M
SD
Highly Adjusted Male Students
51
66.14
9.07
Highly Adjusted Females Students
113
t-value
5.32*** 73.88
8.44
***=P<0.001 As per table-2, when the comparison between the mean academic performance scores of the highly adjusted male students and highly adjusted female students is observed, it is found that the mean academic performance scores of the Urdu medium male students is 53.83 whereas it is 58.77 for the Urdu medium female students. When the difference in mean academic performance scores of these two groups is subjected to t-test, it is found to be 5.30 which is significant beyond 0.001 level. This shows that the highly Urdu medium female students are significantly better in academic performance as compared to the Urdu medium male counterparts. Table: 3 Significance of Difference in the Mean Academic Performance Scores of Low Adjusted Male and Low Adjusted Female Students Groups
N
M
SD
Low Adjusted Male Students
93
54.95
8.35
Low Adjusted Female Students
75
54.32
7.21
www.ijmer.in
t-value 0.51
101
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
From the above table-3, when the comparison between the mean academic performance scores of the low adjusted male and low adjusted female students is observed, it is found that the mean academic performance scores of the low adjusted male is 54.95 whereas it is 54.32 for the low adjusted female students. When the difference in mean academic performance scores of these two groups is subjected to t-test, it is found to be 0.51 which is not significant. This shows that there is no significant difference between the academic performance of the low adjusted male and low adjusted female students. Table: 4 Significance of Difference in the Mean Academic Performance Scores of High Adjusted Male and Low Adjusted Male Students Groups
N
M
SD
Highly Adjusted Male Students
51
66.14
9.07
Low Adjusted Male Students
93
t-value
7.46*** 54.95
8.35
***=P<0.001 As per table-4, when the comparison between the mean academic performance scores of highly adjusted male students and low adjusted male students is observed, it is found that the mean academic performance scores of the highly adjusted male students are 66.14 whereas it is 54.95 for the low adjusted male students. When the difference in mean academic performance scores of these two groups is subjected to t-test, it is found to be 7.46 which is significant beyond 0.001 level. This shows that the highly adjusted male students are significantly better in academic performance as compared to the low adjusted male counterparts.
www.ijmer.in
102
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Table: 5 Significance of Difference in the Mean Academic Performance Scores of High Adjusted Female and Low Adjusted Female Students Groups
N
M
SD
Highly Adjusted Female Students
113
73.88
8.44
Low Adjusted Female Students
75
t-value
16.47*** 54.32
7.21
***=P<0.001 From the table-3, when the comparison between the mean academic performance scores of highly adjusted female and low adjusted female students is observed, it is found that the mean academic performance scores of the highly adjusted female is 73.88 whereas it is 54.32 for the low adjusted female students. When the difference in mean academic performance scores of these two groups is subjected to t-test, it is found to be 16.47 which is significant beyond 0.001 level. This shows that the highly adjusted female population is significantly better in academic performance as compared to the low adjusted female students. Thus, the hypothesis H.02: ‘There
will
be
no
significant
difference in the academic performance of Urdu medium male and female secondary level students on the basis of adjustment’, is partially accepted and mainly rejected as out of four comparisons, one is found to differ non-significantly whereas three is found to differ significantly. Major Findings
The coefficients of correlation of adjustment with academic performance for both groups are found to be positive and significant.
www.ijmer.in
103
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Urdu medium female students are significantly better in academic performance as compared to the Urdu medium male counterparts.
No significant difference between the academic performance of the low adjusted male and low adjusted female students.
Highly adjusted male students are significantly better in academic performance as compared to the low adjusted male counterparts.
Highly adjusted female students are significantly better in academic performance as compared to the low adjusted female students.
Educational Implications Education plays a pivotal role to train the individual to adjust and solve the personal, social and economic problems. The process of adjustment starts from the birth and continues till death. Strang (1957) states, ‘Adjustment is a process and not a state…..adjustment is continuous throughout life.’ The findings of the study revealed that adjustment and academic performance for both the groups are found to be positive and significant. Therefore, it is the duty of parents and teachers to provide all necessary facilities to students in terms of congenial environment at home and school, right selection of course books, proper parental care, information sources etc. which are very helpful in optimizing students’ intellectual potential on one hand and in adjustment on the other. The study also revealed that students who have lower adjustment lagged behind in academic performance in comparision with the students who are well adjusted. Therefore, these students need special attention from the parents, teachers and educational administrator. Also, there is a need to organize different types of co-curricular activities in the schools to develop the qualities of cooperation, tolerance, open-mindedness and sharing of responsibilities www.ijmer.in
104
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
to enhance adjustment. Besides, there is a crying need for revitalization of parent-teacher association, to organize remedial teaching programme and to introduce Guidance and Counseling Centers in each and every school. All these arrangements will not only be helpful to the low adjusted students in achieving good adjustment at home, school and society but also helpful in achieving balanced personality which will ultimately enhance their academic performance. References 1. Aggrawal, S. (1998). A study of the factors affecting the scholastic achievement of X class science girls of identical intelligence. Perspectives in Psychological Research. 55-59. 2. Ahmad, N. and Raheem, A. (2003). Intelligence, SES and adjustment as correlates of academic achievement. The Educational Review, 46, (9), 166-169. 3. Best, J. W. and Kahn, J. V. (2003). Research in education. Boston: Allyn and Bacon. 4. Coleman, J. C. (1960). Personality Dynamics and Effective Behaviours. Chicago Scott, Foresman and Comp. 5. Conger, J.J. and Peterson, A.C. (1984). Adolescence and youth: psychological development in a changing world. New York: Harper and Row Publishers. 6. Crow, L.D. and Crow. (1969). Adolescent development and adjustment, Mc Graw-Hill Book Company, United States. 7. Darvin, Charles (1859).
The Origin of Species, London: John
Murray, Albemarle Street, 1859. 8. Garrett, H.E. and Woodworth, R.S. (1981). Statistics in psychology and education. Longman: Green and Company. 9. Good, C.V. (ed. 1973). Dictionary of education. New York: McGraw www.ijmer.in
105
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Hill Book Company. 10. Gurubasappa (2005). Adjustment and mental ability as correlates of academic achievement of secondary EDUTRACKS, March, 2005, 4 (7), 35-36.
school
students.
11. Hawes,Gener,R.& Hawes, Lyn ne Salo p (1982). Concise Dictionary of Education, New York, Northland Reinhold Company.
Th e Van
12. Hurlock, E.B. (1974). Adolescent development. Johannesburg: McGraw-Hill Kagakusha, Limited. 13. Nalini, H. K. and Bhatta, H. S. G. (2009). Study habits and students achievement in relation to home influencing factors. EDUTRACKS, October 2009, 9 (1), 26-29. 14. Mussen, Conger and Kagan, (1974). Child Development and Personality. Second Edition, Harper & Row Publishers, New York. 15. Osaedoh, G. I. & Iyamu, F. I. (2012). Social life adjustment and academic achievement of adolescents in Edo state: Implication for counselling. Ozean Journal of Applied Sciences 2012, 5 (2), 159. 16. Pandian, U. (2013). Adjustment and Anxiety of B.Ed studentTeachers in Puducherry. EDUTRACK, October 13, 13 (2), 23-24. 17. Strang, R. (1957). The adolescent view himself. New York: McGraw-Hill. 18. Sureka (2008).Relationship between Students’ Adjustment and Academic Achievement. EDUTRACK, March, 2008, 7 (7), 26-31. 19. Vashishtha, K. K. (1989). A study of relationship among achievement motivation, adjustment, self concept and academic achievement. Indian Psychological Abstract, 79 (7), 4.
www.ijmer.in
106
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
EMPLOYEE DEVELOPMENT A MOST IMPORTANT FACTOR IN EMPLOYEE RETENTION S.Tephillah Vasantham Lecturer Dept. of Management Studies Lecturer,The American College,Madurai
Introduction: Employees should not treat their organization as a mere source of earning money. Remember, your job is not just to come in the morning, leave in the evening and receive your pay check. On the other hand employers should not treat their employees as slaves. Employers must invest their time and resources in training and developing their workforce for them to become indispensable resources later on. Employees should be developed and prepared to face even the worst situations Employee Development Activities: Employee development activities help in the growth and development of employees, who are the true assets of an organization. You need to respect your employees for them to feel motivated and develop a sense of loyalty and attachment towards the organization. Don’t forget your employees strive really hard for almost the entire day to accomplish the organization’s goals and objectives. They need to be appreciated. The management ought to acknowledge their hard work. Employees who give their heart and soul to the organization also expect something in return. Money could be one motivating factor but nothing like it if you prepare your employee not only for his/her current job but also for future assignments as well. Employees need to grow with time. One cannot apply similar skills and techniques everywhere. Technology also becomes obsolete with time. An individual needs to keep himself/herself abreast with the latest developments to survive the fierce competition. www.ijmer.in
107
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Employee development is important for employees to enhance their skills and upgrade their existing knowledge in order to perform better. Employee development activities prepare individuals for adverse conditions and unforeseen situations. Every employee likes to acquire new skills and learnings while at job. A sense of pride develops when they feel that their organization is investing time and resources to train them. Employee development is essential for extracting the best out of employees.In-house and outsourced trainings, conferences, seminars, sessions make employees better and reliable resources. Make them feel that the responsibility of the organization lies in their shoulders only. Trainings indeed help an employee to perform his/her level best, eventually benefitting the organization and yielding higher profits. You really need to give their careers an extra push. Motivate them to inculcate the habit of reading. Encourage them to register for various online or distance learning courses which will help them enhance their skills along with their jobs.He knows where he is lacking and what all new skills and learnings will help him/her improve his performance and deliver better results. You need to evaluate your performance from time to time to measure the gap between your current stage and desired stage. Employee development activities and trainings help the employees to overcome the gap between their current stage and where they would like to see themselves five years down the line. Employee development activities not only prepare an individual for present but also for the future. Training is important as it makes an employee selfdependent and capable of facing even the worst circumstances with a smile. Organizations who train their employees from time to time do not face the problem of employee attrition. Employees hardly leave such organizations where they are being trained along with their routine jobs. Individuals as a result of various trainings, open house sessions, and forums tend to interact with each other more and thus
www.ijmer.in
108
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
come closer. They do not hesitate to share knowledge, pass on relevant information and even train fellow workers. References: 1. hrweb.mit.edu/...development/...developmental.../typesdevelopment-acti. 2. https://www.fsa.usda.gov/FSA/hrdapp?area=home&subject=trai.. 3. ucsfhr.ucsf.edu/index.php/.../chapter-11-employee-developmenttraining
www.ijmer.in
109
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
COMPARATIVE STUDY TO ASSESS THE KNOWLEDGE ON IMPACT OF CIGARETTE SMOKING AMONG ADOLESCENT BOYS AT SELECTED RURAL &URBAN SCHOOLS S.Madhumozhi BS.c (N) IV year Saveetha College of Nursing Saveetha University Chennai
Mahalaskhmi Associate Professor Saveetha College of Nursing Saveetha University Chennai
INTRODUCTION: Adolescence generally occurs from the age of 10-14 yrs, while the second phase spans the period of 15-19 yrs. Both are the important phases during which the growing individual requires considerable attention. The needs of adolescents, however, have never been fully understood by parents, society, policymakers, &health professional, so they tend to be overwhelmingly, neglected in health as well as in education & development programmers’. Adolescent should be provided with relevant information on sexual matters within the appropriate cultural context as well as nutrition& education about the hazards of smoking, alcohol& drug abuse. Most status have minimum age of 18 yrs for purchasing cigarette, however, almost 58% of teenage smokers reports that they usually buy their own Cigarettes [1992]. Small stones are the most commonly mentioned site for purchase of cigarettes, as most 80% of yours of 12-15 yrs& 80% of youths 16 to 17 yrs of age reported buying cigarette from small stores. Many governments are trying to deter people from smoking with anti-smoking campaigns in mass media stressing the harmful long-term effects of smoking. Passive smoking, or secondhand smoking, which affects people in the immediate vicinity of smokers, is a major www.ijmer.in
110
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
reason for the enforcement of smoking bans. This is a law enforced to stop individuals smoking in indoor public places, such as bars, pubs and restaurants NEED FOR THE STUDY: In India 2013: 26.1% of AI/AN adults in the United States smoked cigarettes, compared with 17.8% of U.S. adults overall. The prevalence of current cigarette smoking was higher among AI/AN men (32.1%) than among AI/AN women (22.0%).From 2005 to 2013, current cigarette smoking prevalence decreased among AI/AN adults (from 32.0% in 2005 to 26.1% in 2013). A study reported between 1882 and 1990 smoking behaviors in 11-14 years of school boys had fallen from 51%-42% in fact many children try their first cigarette while at primary school. Smoking behavior include associating smoking with fun, pleasure smoking as a means of calming nerves and smoking as being sociable and building confidence all of which have been reported by young smokers. Social factors such as parental smoking peer and school influence the believes and behavior of children. The Investigator have come across in her own personal experience that many High school Students are smoking in public places , so, it becomes the felt need of the investigator to plan to assess the knowledge on impact of cigarette smoking among adolescent boys. STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM: Comparative study on knowledge on impact of cigarette smoking among adolescent boys at selected rural and urban schools. OBJECTIVES: To assess the knowledge on impact of on cigarette smoking among adolescents boys at selected rural &urban school.
www.ijmer.in
111
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
To compare the knowledge on impact of cigarette smoking among adolescent boys between rural & urban school students. To determine the association between the socio demographic variables & level of knowledge on impact of on cigarette smoking among adolescent’s boys at selected rural & urban schools. METHODS AND MATERIALS USED: The research approach used in the study was non Experimental research approach by using comparative descriptive design. The study was conducted at selected school with 30 samples. They were selected by using convenient sampling technique. The tool used for the study was socio demographic variable and selected questionnaire to collect the data and data were analyzed by using descriptive and inferential statistics. DATA COLLECTION PROCEDURE: After obtaining permission from the both urban & rural school authorities the sample were selected by convenient sampling technique. Confidentiality was maintained The Knowledge on impact of cigarette smoking was assessed by structured questionnaire method. RESULT: 1. In Rural Area, Out of 15 students, no student (<50%) were in the Inadequate knowledge and 14 students (50%-75%) were in the Moderate knowledge and 1 student (>75%) were in the Adequate knowledge. 2. In Urban Area, Out of 15 students, 2 student (<50%) were in the Inadequate knowledge and 13 students (50%-75%) were in the Moderate knowledge and no student (>75%) were in the Adequate knowledge.
www.ijmer.in
112
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
16 14 12 10 8
Rural
6
Urban
4 2 0 Inadequate
Moderate
Adequate
3. Mean value is 10.6 & 8.93 and the Standard deviation is 1.30 & 2.29 and the paired T-test value is 2.49 CONCLUSION: The aim of the study was to assess the knowledge on impact of cigarette smoking among adolescents boys at selected rural & urban school adolescent boys. The study concluded that the knowledge on impact of cigarette smoking among adolescent boys shows that rural boys had adequate knowledge than the urban boys.
References 1. Rani M et al study on tobacco use in India journal of WHO 2003 India 302015. (P) 401-02 2. Dr.Ap kulakarni et. al Text book of community medicine varamedical publication.mumbai.pg no:730 3. Naresh et.al study on prevalence of smoking and tobacco chewing among adolescents. JMSR journal of medical sciences research sep.2007.1 (1). www.ijmer.in
113
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
4. Seppowickholm.et.al
cigarette,
smoking,
snuff,
use
and
coexisting risk behavior for young males. Journal of tobacco control.27march2002. 5. Quazi s zahiruddin et.al prevalence and pattern of tobacco use among tribal adolescents. Journal tobacco control 8.oct.2011.
www.ijmer.in
114
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
MAP FORMULATION FOR FIRE HAZARD: A CASE STUDY OF AHMEDABAD CITY Nilesh Jha Research Scholar Gujarat Technological University Ahmedabad
Dr. R. K. Gajjar Principal VGEC, Chandkheda & Director Gujarat Technological University Ahmedabad
Introduction Urban habitats are exposed to various hazards like earthquake, floods, fire and landslides if located in mountainous region. Earthquake, flood and landslide are natural hazard but fire can be natural or manmade. Sources of urban fire are LPG cylinders, CNG pipelines, Petrol Pumps, Chemical Factories, Paper Industries, Electric Short Circuit and Power Stations/Substations. For fire followed by earthquakes in multi-storied buildings, sources of fire due to LPG cylinders, CNG pipelines and short circuit are of more concern. Historic record shows that fire is generally triggered after earthquake causing after damages to oil and gas pipelines, electrical transmission lines. Multi-storied buildings in India are designed for hazards like earthquake, cyclone etc. in isolation but a hazard like earthquake is followed by another hazard like fire. The behaviour of the building changes due to this and it leads to premature failure. The percentage of number of non-engineered (nonstandard materials and low construction quality standards) structures is almost 80% in developing countries like India, and almost 50% of the current structures under construction do not follow building codes (Government of India 1998). Poor construction quality and poor quality materials used for construction increases the vulnerability of the building to hazards or a disaster waiting to happen. A Multihazard approach shall therefore be adopted for design of buildings to reduce population at risk to minimum.
www.ijmer.in
115
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
China, India and Bangladesh have the maximum number of deaths occurring each year from natural disasters in Asia (Office for the Coordination of Humanitarian Affairs 2009). The countries of India and Bangladesh are pestered with cyclones and floods every year which leads to the deaths of a large number of people and other direct and indirect losses. According to Resource Management Strategies Inc. (RMSI), in India, the limited availability of data from past losses makes it difficult to estimate risk and potential losses from hazards of the future. The data that is available is sparse and is not easily accessible. The Vulnerability Atlas of India includes hazard maps and has been successful in helping individuals to take action to reduce risk through land use planning (RMSI 2009). Study Area In present research work, the city of Ahmedabad has been studied. Latitude and Longitude of the city is 23.0300° N, 72.5800° E and extends to the area of 464.16 sq. km. For better administration, Ahmedabad Municipal Corporation has divided city into 6 zones of North Zone, South Zone, East Zone, West Zone, New West Zone and Central Zone (Refer map – 1). This is further divided into 64 wards based on the population for better governance. The city houses about 17 lac buildings which includes residential, non-residential and industrial etc. Historic data indicates that this city has been worst affected by the Earthquake, latest being of Bhuj - 2001. Further during monsoon season at times some of the localities of the city are water logged due to high intensity rainfall. This leads to tremendous loss of necessary
infrastructure
facilities
like
roads
and
bridges.
As
Ahmedabad is one of the major city and also commercial capital of the state of Gujarat, nearly 23% of total population of Gujarat stays in this city. Old Buildings and Bunglows are demolished for construction of Towers within corporation limits of the city.
www.ijmer.in
116
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Map – 1 : Different wards with zone boundary Map – 2: Zoning regulation by local authority For construction of any new buildings or towers, client has to take permission of Municipal Corporation. But here only the emphasis is being laid on the Floor Space Index (FSI) which is the governing criteria for building regulation (Zoning Guidelines mentioned in map 2). The Building Use Permission is granted by Corporation after checking the FSI regulation and fire safety guideline as it is a prerequisite. Structural Safety and Health is given little importance till date in the city. Even if Structural Safety certificate is issued by a competent practicing Structural Engineer for Building as Earthquake Resistant Structure, the question is its frequency and parameters. Due diligence is also required during construction phase of Building for structural detailing and quality of construction. Also the effect of earthquake is considered on building in isolation with other hazards. But generally hazards can be linked up with one another as it is very common that during earthquake, buildings are susceptible to fire due to short circuit or gas leakage or pipeline bursting. Methodology The research study is based on multi-storied government buildings within the limits of Ahmedabad city. The total population of the city is more than 45.0 lacs. In present research work, the effect of earthquake is taken as base hazard and multi storied buildings www.ijmer.in
117
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
vulnerable to EQ are identified from 76 sample buildings (refer map 3). The parameters for assessing the vulnerability of earthquake hazard are Soil Profile, Ground Water Table, N – Value, Shear Velocity (Vs), Fault Line, Lineaments, Zoning Regulation etc. Finally 4 multi-storied buildings are found to be vulnerable to earthquake. One newly constructed multi-storied building and one old building in the locality of maximum population density are also added as per the advice of experts for study purpose. Various details of study buildings related to construction and planning are collected through field survey. Locational details of study buildings along with 1 km radial buffer are constructed for further assessment of risk for earthquake and fire hazard (refer map – 4). Fire hazard map is also formulated in GIS considering various parameters like historic call record of fire in Ahmedabad city, gas pipeline details, road network, location of various major industrial units, water pipeline network, location of petrol pumps and CNG stations, zoning regulations of local development authority and population density of the locality. Location of fire station is also mapped for rescue operations. Location of 6 study buildings is then superimposed on the fire hazard map.
Map – 3: Location of sample buildings Map – 4: Location of pre-identified study buildings for fire hazard
www.ijmer.in
118
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
For formulation of map for historic record for fire calls, data for fire call event has been collected from fire department of local authority. Based on the availability of data of past 7 years, the call record is further segregated ward wise and the reason for the occurrence of fire for each and every fire call is furnished. A point file is generated in GIS software and a map is developed based on the above inputs as shown in map – 5. Details along with location of CNG pipeline network lines are collected from Adani Gas Limited and are further digitized in GIS software for the formulation of map (map – 6).
Map – 5: Map showing historical fire call details Map – 6: CNG Pipeline details within city The road network of the entire city as well as water distribution pipeline network is collected from Municipal Corporation. This data is fed into GIS for formulation of map referred as map – 7 and map – 8.
Map – 7: Road Network of Ahmedabad City. Map – 8: CNG pipeline network details within city www.ijmer.in
119
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Location of different industrial estates within the city limits are also mapped as these can be the major sources of fire (map – 9). Details of number of the households in various wards are collected from Census Department, Government of India and map is generated as shown in map – 10.
Map – 9: Location of various industrial estates Map – 10: No. of household in different wards Data of population is also collected from census department as population at risk is to be calculated for different study buildings and a map is formulated accordingly in GIS (map – 11). Other details of Ahmedabad city like landmark and fire stations is also collected by field survey and information is fed into GIS software for study purpose (map – 12).
Map – 11: Details of population in city Map – 12: Landmarks and fire station details in city www.ijmer.in
120
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Data Analysis After formulation of all the above maps, specific maps are also formulated for 5 study buildings. Based on the experience of experts, professionals and academicians 1 km radial distance from each of the study building is considered as buffer region for calculation of population at risk. For calculating area of water pipeline and CNG pipelines 100m radial distance from centre line of pipeline is considered vulnerable based on experience of experts. Specific maps are formulated for all the five study buildings with relevant details as mentioned above with vulnerable area of 1 km radial distance.
Map – 13: Sales Tax Bhavan with all parametres Map – 14: Bachat Bhavan
Map – 15: L. G. Hospital hostel building (under construction) Map – 16: M. S. Building
www.ijmer.in
121
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Map – 17: Apna Bazar in locality with high population density Map – 18: Map with all the study buildings with all parameters Other building specific details like Height of Each Floor, Approach to Road, Distance of Building from Fire Station, Distance between adjacent Buildings, Availability of Open Space, No. of Exit in Given Building, Provision of Fire Safety, Fire Fighting Equipment’s Installed, Provision of Pantry/ Kitchen, Fuel used in Pantry with type of fuel Used, Gas Pipelines in Vicinity, Population in vicinity likely to be affected and No. of Potential Users of Building are also collected. For calculation of buildings that are more vulnerable, entire data is sorted into the categories of high risk, moderate risk and low risk. The parameters that are considered for vulnerability analysis of these study buildings for fire hazard are gas pipeline, water pipeline, population, household units, historical incidents, river, road connectivity, location of fire station from building and location of GIDC. This table is formulated based on experience and the data collected by field survey (refer table – 1).
www.ijmer.in
122
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Parameters Gas Pipe line Area & Water Trunk main Area Population Household Historical Incident data (Fire Calls) River Road Connectivity Fire Station GIDC / Major Industries
High Risk
≥ 50% ≥ 50000 ≥ 20000
Moderate Risk
Low Risk
49.9 % - 25 % 49999 - 25000 19999 - 10000
< 25% < 25000 <10000
≥ 100 99 - 50 < 50 < 10% 10 % - 19.9 % ≥ 20% Approach Other District Road Road MDR ≥ 8.0 KM 4 - 7.9 KM < 4. 0 KM Building within ≥ 1.0 KM from GIDC Outskirts GIDC GIDC
Table – 1: Risk Quantification for fire hazard
Based on the above table, risk is calculated for study buildings and measure of exposure of population to fire hazard, vulnerability index is generated (Table – 2)
www.ijmer.in
123
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Sr . N o
Name
Tot al Are a (Ha )
Gas pip e are a (Ha )
Wate r Pipe Area (Ha)
Tot al Are a (Ha )
Populat ion
Histor ical Data (Fire Calls)
Hous e hold units
1
L.G Hospit al Hostel Buildin g M.S Buildin g Bachat Bhavan Sales Tax Bhavan Apna Bazar
314
52
80
132
95000
100
314
43
0
43
77000
314
0
66
66
314
48
51
314
0
70
2
3 4
5
Gas / Wate r Area %
Ward Area (Ha.)
Fact or
Pop. Dist n
H.H. _ Dist n
Ran k
22000
Wate r Body (Riv er/ Pond / Lake )% 7
42
279
113
10691 8
24760
1
150
14000
0
14
1265
25
19113
3475
4
60000
80
12000
17
21
209
150
90144
18029
3
99
50000
80
10000
21
32
716
44
21927
4385
5
70
110340
78
13552
20
22
212
148
16342 8
20072
2
Table – 2: Vulnerability Index for Study Buildings
www.ijmer.in
124
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Table – 3: Risk Assessment of Study Buildings Parameters
Study Buildings Apna Bazar L. G. Hospital Hostel Building Bachat Bhavan M. S. Building Sales Tax Bhavan
Gas pipeline & Water trunk main area
Fire Calls
L
M
M
Impact of industrial estates
Road Connectivity
Location of Fire Station
Household units
Population likely to be affected
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
L
L
L
L
H
H
L
M
M
L
L
L
M
H
L
H
H
L
L
L
L
M
M
M
L
L
L
L
L
M
Where
www.ijmer.in
River Area
H = High Risk , M = Moderate Risk L = Low Risk
125
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Vulnerability assessment of the study buildings based on the above mentioned parameters clearly indicates that L. G. hospital hostel building seems to be more vulnerable as compared to other buildings. Conclusion 1. The city of Ahmedabad being categorised in zone – III for earthquake hazard, there are more changes of occurrence of fire due to earthquake. So the multi-storied buildings shall be checked for combination of earthquake + fire both. 2. Fire hazard map formulated using GIS software can serve as an important tool for assessment of buildings and shall be further considered for assessment of risk for multi-storied buildings during planning stage. 3. Multi-storied buildings having assessed for hazard of earthquake + fire, out of 76 multi-storied sample buildings analysed for earthquake hazard, population at risk is maximum for L. G. hospital hostel building and Apna bazar. 4. Specific guidelines shall be formulated for Multihazard by local authorities as there are maximum chances of occurrence of hazard simultaneously so as to have minimum casualty. References: 1. U. S. department of labour, Fire service features of buildings and fire protection systems by Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA: 3256 – 07N), 2006 2. Long T. Phan, Therese P. McAllister, John L. Gross and Morgan J. Hurley (SFPE), NIST technical note 1681; Best practice guidelines for structural fire resistance design of concrete and steel buildings, November, 2010
www.ijmer.in
126
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
3. Charles R. Scawthorn, S.E., The shakeout study scenario, supplemental study: Fire following Earthquake, SPA Risk LLC, Berkeley CA, 2008 4. Jane I. Lateille, Fire Protection Engineering in Building Design (2003) 5. Regional workshop on Best practices in Disaster Mitigation: Hazard Mapping and Risk Assessment, pg: 97 – 102. 6. John R. Hall Jr., High Rise Building Fires, September, 2013 7. Proceedings of Ninth world conference on earthquake engineering, Assessment of evacuation possibilities of apartments in multistoried buildings during earthquakes or subsequent fires in view of earthquake preparedness: vol. – VII, pg: 687 – 692. 8. National Building Code of India – 2005, Bureau of Indian Standards 9. G. B. Menon and J. N. Vakil, Commentary on National Building Code – 2005: Fire and Life Safety 10. Aakash Ahuja (MIT), Review of assessment, design and mitigation of multiple hazards, 2011 11. Application of fire safety engineering principles to the design of buildings – part 7: Probabilistic risk assessment (2003).
www.ijmer.in
127
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
ASSESS THE EFFECTIVENESS OF BREATHING EXERCISE IN PREVENTION OF RESPIRATORY COMPLICATIONS AMONG THE PATIENT WHO UNDERGONE MAJOR SURGERY IN SAVEETHA MEDICAL COLLEGE HOSPITAL, CHENNAI Miss. Uma Maheswari.L M.Sc (N) Student Saveetha College of Nursing Thandalam, Chennai
Dr. Aruna Saveetha College of Nursing Thandalam, Chennai
Dr. Mangala Gowri Principal Saveetha College of Nursing Thandalam, Chennai Introduction Postoperative respiratory complications plays a significant role in the risk for major surgery. To prevent postoperative surgical complication, practice in breathing exercises should be reinforced to prevent pneumonia, plimonary effusion, atelectasis. The patient is encouraged to take three deep breaths exhaling through the mouth. Deep breathing exercise in the postoperative period help the patient to eliminate inhalation anesthetics, prevent alveolar collapse and move respiratory secretions to larger airway passages for expectoration. They should be done several times each hour during the immediate postoperative period. Research Methodology: pre experimental research design with one group pre test and post test design was used to assess the effectiveness of breathing exercise to prevent the respiratory complications among the patients who undergone major surgery in Saveetha medical College Hospital, Chennai. The number of samples selected for the study was 30 using convenient sampling techinique. The respiratory status of the study www.ijmer.in
128
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
group were assessed by using Modified Aldrte Score before the breathing exercise. After the breathing exercise was given for 15 minutes,2times/ day for 4 days the respiratory status was assessed by using the same scale. the samples were assessed for reduction in the respiratory complications. RESULTS: 1. In study group, out of 30 samples, 8(27%) samples had normal respiratory status 10(33%) had mild alterations in respiratory status and 12(40%)of patients had poor respiratory status in pre test. 2.
In study group out of 30 samples, 22(73%) samples had
normal respiratory status 6(20%) had mild alterations in respiratory status and 2(7%)of patients had poor respiratory status in post test. 3. Breathing exercise was found to be effective in prevention of respiratory complications among patients who underwent major surgery. It was statistically significant at P< 0.001. 4. There was no significant association between post operative respiratory complications and age, sex, type of work, habit of smoking, history of respiratory asthma Compare the level of respiratory status among the patient who undergone major surgery in study group. Mean
Study group Standard deviation 2.334 1.942
PRE TEST 4.5 POST 7.4 TEST COMPARE 2.76 1.300 Note: *** - P<0.001 Level of Significant
www.ijmer.in
Paired ‘t’ test P value t = 11.64 P = 0.001***
129
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
The above table reveals that there was a significant reduction in level of respiratory complications of patients who received the breathing exercise in study group. It shows that breathing exercise was effective in reducing the level of respiratory complications of patients who underwent major surgery (P<0.001). Conclusion: This study indicates that breathing exercise is a simple nonpharmacological and cost effective method. It can be used effectively in prevention of respiratory complications among the patients who undergone major surgery. References 1. Ansari. (2012). Medical Surgical Nursing-I. India.. s. Vikas and medical publishers. 2. Basvanthapa. BT (2009). Medical Surgical Nursing. New Delhi: Jaypee brothers medical publishers (p) LTD 3. Basvanthapa. BT (2000). Nursing Research. New Delhi:Jaypee publishers. 4. Black. (2005) Medical Delhi.Elsevier publishers.
Surgical
Nursing.
New
5. Calmer. R.. (2002) Moroney’s surgery for nurses. Noida: Elsevier publishers. 6. Curtis .B. (1997). Encyclopedia for medical care. New York: crown publishers. 7. Dorsey.
W.
(1992).
Family
health
and
medical
Guide.philadelphia: Saunders publishers. 8. Fred. (2004). Practical guide to the care of medical patient. New delhi: Lewis publishers.
www.ijmer.in
130
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
9. George .J .B. (2011). Nursing Theories. New Delhi: Pearson Publishers. 10. Holland AE, Hill CJ. (2012) “ Breathing exercises for post operative patients. Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews.” 11. Lewis. (2011). Medical Surgical Nursing. New Delhi: Elsevier publishers. 12. Lippincott. (2005). Mannual nursing practice. Nodia: Jaypee medical publishers. 13. Monahan.
(2003).
Medical-surgical
Health
and
Illness
perspective China: Mosby’s publications. 14. Moroney’s. (2005) surgery for nurses .NewDelhi : Elsevier Publications. 15. Phipps. (2009). Medical Surgical Nursing. Newdwlhi: Wolters publishers. 16. Potter, (2009). Fundamentals of nursing. Newdelhi: Elsevier India private limited. 17. Pricilla. (2008), medical Surgical Nursing, Sanat Publishers.
Newdelhi:
18. Sharma, (2011), Nursing research Haryana: Elsevier India Pvt LTD
and
statistics.
Surgical
Nursing.
Surgical
Nursing.
19. Straight
.A,
(2000)
Medical
China:Wolters Kluwers Publications. 20. Suzzanne.C.,
(2001)
Medical
Philadelphia: Lippincott publications. 21. Sundar Rao. (2006) Introduction to Biostatistics and research methods. New Delhi: Ashok Publishers. www.ijmer.in
131
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
22. Williams.S. (2008). Understanding medical surgical nursing. New Delhi: Jaypee medical publishers. 23. Barclay. (2007). Pulmonary complications of major surgery : hospital medicine. 49, 23-25. 24. Brunn. (1997). Predictors of postoperative pulmonary complications following major surgery: CHEST net journals.111, 564-71. 25. Cahill.H.(1977) Day surgery- principles and practice : British journal of surgery, 83(2), 267-68. 26. Ezhilarasu. (2013) Quasi experimental research design: Indian Journal of continuing nursing education. 13(1), 33. 27. Jawaid, M.(2006). Post operative complications in general surgical ward of a teaching hospital : Pak journal of medical science. 22 (2) , 171. 28. Rao m. (2007) Fast Track surgery – New concept : Journal of surgery. 56(3), 314-23. 29. Relan. M.(2008). Peri operative assessment and management of the patient with pulmonary disease. Journal of the Saudhiheart. 59(1) , 19-22. 30. Sadan. (2012). Quasi experimental designs : Indian journal of continuing education. July-december , 13(2), 32-36. 31. Valerie.A. (2006). Functional independence after major surgery : journal of the American College of Surgeons,54(6). 1072-1075.
www.ijmer.in
132
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
INFLUENCE OF SHAPE OF ARCHITECTURAL LAYOUTS ON SEISMIC PERFORMANCE OF BUILDINGS Sreehitha Buddha Dept. of Civil Engineering M.V.G.R College of Engineering Vizianagaram
S. Shiva Prasad Assistant Professor Dept. of Civil Engineering M.V.G.R College of Engineering Vizianagaram
1. INTRODUCTION: Various shapes of buildings are used for construction in the present scenario, For earth quake resistant building, the plan of the building should not be too long nor too elongated and must be symmetrical. Hence I have considered symmetrical buildings of Square, Rectangle, Circle and Triangle shape. Rectangular shaped buildings are most commonly used shape of building in our society, Orientation and space usage made rectangular shaped building to use. Triangular shaped buildings can be constructed in the areas where wind speeds are more, these buildings are eco-friendly with respect to usage of natural light by which conservation of light energy could be done. We go for Square shaped buildings when area is restricted. Circular shaped buildings are oldest shape of buildings used. Circular shaped buildings are best to survive in earthquake zones. Structural analysis means determination of the general shape and all the specific dimensions of a particular structure so that it will perform the function for which it is created and will safely withstand the influences which will act on it throughout its useful life. Present work involves Effect of Wind And Seismic Loads On Different Types Of Building Structures [G +5] ,[G+7] and [G+10] using design software STAAD.ProV8i. The advantages of this software are Easy to use, Provisions of Indian standard codes, different natures of solving any types of problems and accuracy.STAAD.ProV8i is more effective
www.ijmer.in
133
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
software for concrete, steel, aluminum and cold-formed steel design, culverts, tunnels, bridges, timber, piles etc. than other software’s. Generally, STAAD.ProV8i used to generate different types of models easily and also analysis and design is completed very significantly. STAAD.Pro is a general purpose of structural analysis and design program with applications in the commercial buildings, highway structures, industrial structures, chemical plant structures, dams, retaining walls, turbine foundations and other embedded structures, etc. The step by step Process of my present study is given below: 1. Beam and column members are represented by lines. Walls, slabs and panel type entities are represented using triangular and quadrilateral finite elements. Solid blocks are represented using brick elements. 2. Analysis engines for performing linear elastic and p-delta analysis, finite element analysis, frequency extraction, and dynamic response (spectrum, time history, steady state, etc.). 3. Design engines for code checking and optimization of steel, aluminum and timber members. Reinforcement calculations for concrete beams, columns, slabs, Design of shear and moment connections for steel members. 4. Result verification and report generation tools for examining displacement diagrams, bending moment and shear force diagrams. 2. Theory There are different kinds of loads and the load which I considered are: DEAD LOADS: Dead loads shall be calculated on basis of unit weights which shall be established taking into consideration the materials www.ijmer.in
134
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
specified for construction. This consist of walls, partitions, floors, roofs including the weights of all other permanent structures. It may be calculated on the basis of unit weights of materials given in IS 875(part -1). a) Basic wind speed (Vb): IS 875(part-3), gives basic wind speed map of India, as applicable to 10m height above mean ground level for different zones of the country. b) Design Wind Speed (Vz): The basic wind speed (Vz) for any site shall be obtained and shall be modified to include the following effects of design wind velocity at any height (Vz) for the chosen structure: a) Risk level; b) Terrain roughness, height and size of structure; and c) Local topography. It can be mathematically expressed as follows: Vz= Vb * k1 * k2* k3 Vb = design wind speed at any height z in m/s; K1= probability factor (risk coefficient) K2 = terrain, height and structure size factor and K3= topography factor As per this study, Vb = 35 m/s, K1=1, k2= 0.85, k3=1 c)Design Wind Pressure – The design wind pressure at any height above mean ground level shall be obtained by the fallowing relationship between wind pressure and wind velocity : Pz =0.6 Vz² Where, Pz = Design wind pressure in N/m² at height z , and Vz = Design wind velocity in m/s at height z. SEISMIC LOAD: The seismic forces shall be calculated in accordance with IS 1893(part-1). This code deals with assessment of seismic load on various structures and earthquake resistant of design of buildings. Seismic load depends upon the following criteria:
www.ijmer.in
135
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
a) Design horizontal acceleration co-efficient (Ah): It is a horizontal acceleration co-efficient that shall be used for design of structures. Ah = ZISa / 2Rg Where, Z= Zone factor I = Importance factor R = Response reduction factor Sa/ g = Avg. response acceleration co-efficient b) Design Lateral Force: It is the horizontal seismic force prescribed by this standard that shall be used to design a structure. c) Design Seismic Base Shear: The total design lateral force or design seismic base shear (Vb) along shall be determined by the following expression: Vb = Ah W Where, Ahs = horizontal acceleration spectrum W = seismic weight of all the floors. d) Fundamental natural period(T): It is the first longest model time period of vibration. e) Time History Method: Time history method of analysis shall be based on an appropriate ground motion and shall be performed using accepted principles of dynamics. f) Response Spectrum Method:- The representation of the maximum response of idealized single degree freedom systems having certain period and damping during earthquake ground motion. PLAN DETAILS: Total area of plan is 5000 SFT and [G+5] ,[G+7] and [G+10] story building frames with circular, rectangular, triangular and square www.ijmer.in
136
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
shapes are modeled using AUTO CAD and analysis is performed in STAAD PRO Software. The height of each story is kept as 3 m in the structures with different total heights according to number of story. Analysis and design of the structure is done and then the results generated by these software’s are compared and a conclusion is drawn from them.
Fig: circular plan
Fig: square plan
Fig: rectangular plan
Fig: traingular plan
1. Materials properties: Steel: Modulus of elasticity of steel, E = 200 Gpa, Poisson’s ratio, μ = 0.3,
www.ijmer.in
137
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Steel density = 77 Kn/m3(7.850 Kg/m3),Yield strength of steel, Fy =450 Mpa, Ultimate yield strength of steel, Fu = 450 Mpa Concrete: Characteristic strength of concrete, Fck = 25 Mpa, Density of concrete, = 25 Kn/m3 Building Parameters: Area of plan=5000 sft, No of story =5,7 and 10,
Story
height=3m
,
No
of
columns
:
30.,
Main
Beam=420mmx300mm, Column =420mmx420mm, Support condition =fixed Dead Load: Self weight factor:1 and Main wall load =13.Kn/m Live Load: live load = 2Kn/m2 and Floor load= 4 Kn/m2 Seismic weight: Self weight factor:1, Main wall load =13.5 Kn/m and Live Load = 3.75 Kn/m2 Seismic parameters: Code -IS 1893-2002 - Seismic analysis in X and Z directions. Method of combining approach shapes – Whole quadratic combination with: Damping ratio= 0.05 (5%): Zone = II (0.16): Soil type =Medium II: Importance factor =1:Response Reduction factor = 5:Time period (Ta) = 0.54 sec (calculate as per 1893:2002) Wind load Wind intensity =15m for 2 Kn/m 3.MODELING The analysis of frames with different plans is to be performed. For this purpose, four frame models are selected as shown below, here circular, rectangular, square and triangular frame that consists of five, seven and ten stored with 3m height of each floor. As per IS code 1893 -2002, the natural time period is 2.025 sec. Number of members, nodes and supports of all four building frames are shown in below. Material www.ijmer.in
138
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
properties considered for the analysis using STAAD. Physical properties of members selected for the analysis are taken from above data. Dead load and Live loads considered for the analysis are given taken from above data. Earthquake loads considered for the calculation of seismic weights are as per the IS 1893(Part 1) : 2002.
Circular-shaped frame
Rectangular –shaped frame
Square-shaped frame
Triangular –shaped frame
www.ijmer.in
139
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Table for maximum beam displacement and nodal displacement results using combination loading
FRAME
beam relative displacements(mm)
node displacements summary (mm)
Ma xx
Ma xy
Ma xz
Max
Horizon tal X
Horizo ntal Y
Horizo ntal Z
Resul tant
G+5 SQUARE
4.0 56
6.1 6
3.3 58
16.3 54
37.419
2.17
65.337
108.4 17
G+5RECTA NGLE
1.7 47
2.1 8
2.3 13
7.32
41.762
1.056
48.854
67.18 9
G+5TRIAN GLE
2.0 38
3.4 58
3.2 27
11.0 19
40.77
1.472
95.214
104.5 06
G+5 CIRCLE
1.7 47
2.1 8
2.3 13
7.32
41.762
1.056
48.854
67.18 9
G+7 SQUARE
3.7 8
6.1 68
3.2 65
15.3 27
71.034
3.013
114.51
135.7 67
G+7RECTA NGLE
2.0 1
2.2 22
2.4 33
7.11 3
71.797
1.339
70.707
93.40 7
G+7TRIAN GLE
1.5 76
3.4 64
3.2 23
10.2 72
58.204
1.47
101.131
104.1 96
G+7 CIRCLE
1.7 25
1.6 99
2.4 85
3.47 3
66.683
1.553
101.514
101.8 84
G+10 SQUARE
4.4 22
6.5 56
4.1 07
15.6 86
147.209
4.254
217.77
241.2 79
G+10RECT ANGLE
2.6 54
2.5 91
2.8 87
7.08 1
140.278
2.115
139.758
166.2 74
G+10TRIA NGLE
2.3 9
3.4 95
3.2 23
10.7 58
90.823
2.019
146.008
158.8 97
G+10 CIRCLE
2.3 16
2.4 97
3.3 57
3.67 3
131.323
2.178
195.594
196.1 28
Table for require amount of steel , concrete and moments and forces using combination loading www.ijmer.in
140
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
FRAME
Amount of Steel(N)
Amount of Concrete(m3 )
G+5 SQUARE
144736.0
G+5RECTANGLE
Beam end forces Fx kN
Fy kN
Fz kN
86
3506.30 8
266.72 4
79.805
249199.4
167.14
2884.74 1
248.69 5
49.967
G+5TRIANGLE
221994.8
138.29
4000.08 1
379.17
72.565
G+5 CIRCLE
276395.4
226.61
1644.54 9
129.93 8
41.773
G+7 SQUARE
208297.5
121.28
4364.95 9
264.53 9
95.007
G+7RECTANGLE
324554.8
220.69
3761.97
247.71 5
60.339
G+7TRIANGLE
307276.8
207.13
4348.18 9
378.84 1
72.751
G+7 CIRCLE
298923.2
248.46
2005.87 4
125.98 1
51.172
G+10 SQUARE
313775.4 7
171.48
5625.59 9
264.22 6
117.84 3
G+10RECTANGL E
436513
285.49
4980.74 2
246.48 2
76.121
G+10TRIANGLE
455811.2
278.21
6517.12 4
376.19
74.028
G+10 CIRCLE
397140.2
325.13
2553.38 6
168.37 5
70.616
www.ijmer.in
141
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
G+10 CIRCLE
17222
G+10TRIANGLE
325
19766
G+10RECTANGLE
278
18929
G+10 SQUARE
285
13607
171
0 G+7 CIRCLE
12963
248
G+7TRIANGLE
13325
207
G+7RECTANGLE
221
14074
G+7 SQUARE
121
9033 0
G+5 CIRCLE
11986
G+5TRIANGLE
227
9627
G+5RECTANGLE
138
10807
G+5 SQUARE
6276 0
167 86
5000
10000
Amount of Steel(N)
15000
20000
25000
Amount of Concrete(m3)
Graph: amount of steel and concrete. According to above data specified in above table optimization is performed with changing column and beams cross section sizes. And again analysis is performed with maintain same loading conditions. Results are shown as below. Main Beam sizes are 420mmx230mm, Column sizes are 420mmx300mm.
www.ijmer.in
142
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Table for maximum beam displacement and nodal displacement optimized results using combination loading. OPTIMIZ ED
BEAM MAXIMUM RELATIVE DISPLACEMENT (MM)
NODE DISPLACEMENTS SUMMARY (MM)
Max
Horiz antal X
1.065
4.671
10.569
0.359
9.265
35.2 94
2.811
0.831
6.207
35.375
1.019
21.55 3
42.3 33
0.903
3.856
1.185
8.983
31.981
0.828
42.64 3
53.0 94
G+5 CIRCLE
0.79
0.716
0.802
2.279
21.316
0.537
22.83 2
23.5 58
G+7 SQUARE
0.961
2.289
0.495
3.758
16.198
0.461
14.77 9
31.4 41
G+7REC TANGLE
0.726
2.263
0.723
5.247
33.282
0.718
34.80 9
37.5 88
G+7TRIA NGLE
1.081
2.949
0.822
6.217
48.667
1.301
29.86
52.9 16
G+7 CIRCLE
0.852
0.999
0.864
2.132
33.397
0.647
34.61 6
35.0 39
G+10 SQUARE
0.901
2.348
0.522
3.582
29.887
0.677
27.68 9
43.1 45
G+10RE CTANGL E
0.532
1.651
0.443
3.476
38.606
0.973
40.97 7
44.7 94
G+10TRI ANGLE
0.901
2.348
0.522
3.582
29.887
0.677
27.68 9
43.1 45
G+10 CIRCLE
0.587
0.92
0.604
1.411
36.935
0.66
37.33 8
37.9 38
FRAME
Max x
Max y
Max z
G+5 SQUARE
1.632
2.3
G+5REC TANGLE
1.15
G+5TRIA NGLE
www.ijmer.in
Horiz antal Y
Horiz ontal Z
resu ltan t
143
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Table for require amount of steel , concrete and moments and forces of optimized results using combination loading OPTIMIZED FRAME
AMOUNT OF
BEAM END FORCES
CONCRETE(M3) Fx kN
Fy kN
Fz kN
G+5 SQUARE
398.83 3952.265 299.058 177.187
G+5RECTANGLE
251.71 2831.034 243.665
G+5TRIANGLE
255.72 3939.072 362.446 103.334
G+5 CIRCLE
265.85 1704.268 129.134
G+7 SQUARE
595.32
G+7RECTANGLE
472.92 3817.317 246.389
G+7TRIANGLE
358.91
4480.55 380.787
80.489
G+7 CIRCLE
376.93 2092.851 125.331
50.986
G+10 SQUARE
879.01 6243.431 286.999 171.355
G+10RECTANGLE
806.55 5322.174 246.826
G+10TRIANGLE
555.46 6702.847 386.753 114.254
G+10 CIRCLE
779.36 2778.978 147.938
www.ijmer.in
43.576
36.5
4860.44 287.331 152.903 76.57
88.384
74.23
144
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
G+10 CIRCLE
24942
G+10TRIANGLE
779
27343
G+10RECTANGLE
555 807
31955
G+10 SQUARE
36331
G+7 CIRCLE
13618
G+7TRIANGLE
377
17408
G+7RECTANGLE
359
22155
G+7 SQUARE
473
24929
G+5 CIRCLE
9922
G+5TRIANGLE
12303
G+5 SQUARE
17940 0
595
266
15486
G+5RECTANGLE
879
256 252 399
5000 10000 15000 20000 25000 30000 35000 40000
AMOUNT OF STEEL M3
AMOUNT OF CONCRETE M3
Graph: amount of steel and concrete of optimized results. 4.CONCLUSIONS: 1. The % increase on amount of concrete and amount of steel from Circle to triangle for height 18 meters is around 21%. 2. The % increase on amount of concrete and amount of steel from rectangle to triangle for height 18 meters is around 13%. 3. The % increase on amount of concrete and amount of steel from square to rectangle for height 18 meters is around 52%. 4. The order of highest cost of construction to lowest cost of construction spent on design would be Square, triangle, rectangle and circle in case of RCC construction at height of 18 www.ijmer.in
145
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
meters with same area of plinth and numbers of columns, hence circular shape of structures are economical at this height of construction. 5. The % increase on amount of concrete and amount of steel from Circle to triangle for height 21 meters is around 8.6%. 6. The % increase on amount of concrete and amount of steel from triangle to rectangle for height 21 meters is around 29.6%. 7. The % increase on amount of concrete and amount of steel from rectangle to square for height 21 meters is around 19.54%. 8. The order of highest cost of construction to lowest cost of construction spent on design would be Square, rectangle, triangle and circle in case of RCC construction at height of 21 meters with same area of plinth and numbers of columns, hence circular shape of structures are economical at this height of construction. 9. The % increase on amount of concrete and amount of steel from Circle to triangle for height 33 meters is around 16.4%. 10. The % increase on amount of concrete and amount of steel from triangle to rectangle for height 33 meters is around 31.4%. 11. The % increase on amount of concrete and amount of steel from rectangle to square for height 33 meters is around 11%. 12. The order of highest to lowest cost of construction spent on design would be Square, rectangle, circle and triangle in case of RCC construction at height of 33 meters with same area of plinth and numbers of columns, hence circular shape of structures are economical at this height of construction.
www.ijmer.in
146
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
References 1. M.G.Shaikh and Hashmi S.Shakeeb “Effect of Seismic Joint in the Performance of Multi-Storeyed L-Shaped Building”, IOSR Journal of Mechanical Volume 10, Issue 1 (Nov. - Dec. 2013), PP 70-77. 2. Abhay Guleria “Structural Analysis of a Multi-Storeyed Building using ETABS for different Plan Configurations” by (IJERT) ,Vol. 3 Issue 5, May – 2014. 3.
Ramesh konakalla “Response study of multi-storied buildings with plan irregularity subjected to earthquake and wind loads using linear static analysis”, IOSR ,p-issn: 2320334 x pp 12-19.
4. Mahmad sabeer “comparison design result of R.C.C building using staad and etabs software”, (IJIRAE), issue 8, volume 2 (august 2015). 5. Sanhik Kar Majumder “Comparison Between Wind And Seismic Load On Different Types Of Structures”, IJESI, Volume 3 Issue 4 , April 2014 PP.41-54. 6. T. Kijewski, D. Kwon, A. Kareem, “E-Technologies for Wind Effects on Structures”, Proceedings of 11th International Conference on Wind Engineering, Vol.2, 2003. pp. 22172224. 7. ASCE, ASCE 7-98: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, 2000. 8.
Bungale S. Taranath , “Wind and Earthquake resistant buildings: Structural analysis and design”, CRC press, 2nd edition May 2012.
www.ijmer.in
147
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE AS A TOOL TO MANAGE STRESS IN GRADUATE WOMEN STUDENTS Addala. Sree Padmavalli
G. Rajendra Prasad
Research Scholor Department of Management Studies Adikavi Nannaya University Rajahmundry
Research Scholor Département of Management Studies Adikavi Nannaya University Rajahmundry
We all have different personalities, different wants and needs, and different ways of showing our emotions. Navigating through this all takes tact and cleverness – especially if we hope to succeed in life. This is where EI becomes important. Emotional intelligence describes the ability to understand one's own feelings. It also provides great insight on how emotion influences motivation and behavior. The concepts of Emotional Intelligence have been around since the early 20th century, but the term was first introduced by Wayne Payne in 1985. Emotional Intelligence is the ability to understand, accept and recognize our own emotions and feelings, including their impact on ourselves and other people and to use this knowledge to improve our own behaviors as well as to manage and improve our relationship with others (Ann Cartwright and Amanda Solloway, 2007). Emotional intelligence is the ability to perceive emotions, to access and generate emotions so as to assist thought, to understand emotions and emotional knowledge, and to reflectively regulate emotions so as to promote emotional and intellectual growth (Mayer & Salovey, 1997).These four areas are further defined, as Identifying Emotions as the ability to recognize how you and those around you are feeling. Using Emotions is the ability to generate emotion, and then reason with this emotion. Understanding Emotions is the ability to understand complex emotions and emotional "chains", how emotions transition from one stage to another. Managing Emotions is the ability which allows you to manage emotions in yourself and in others. www.ijmer.in
148
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Stress may be caused due to different reasons such as the death of a loved one, Getting married, Moving to a new home, Chronic illness or injury, Taking care of an elderly or sick family member, Traumatic event, such as a natural disaster, theft, rape, or violence against you or a loved one. But this study is concerned about the stress results from un controlled emotions such as depression, anxiety, anger, grief, guilt, low self-esteem. Some degree of stress is a normal part of life and provides part of the stimulus to learn and grow, without having an adverse effect on health. When stress is intense, continuous or repeated ill health, depression and decrease the confidence levels can result .The experience of stress can affect the way individuals think, feel and behave, and can also cause physiological changes. Many of the short and long term illnesses caused by stress can be accounted for by the physiological changes that take place when the body is placed under stress. Excessive stress can destroy the quality of life and also affect the career of students. Thus there is a need of controlled emotions and these controlled emotions can be earned through the concept of emotional intelligence. Emotional Intelligence and Stress Management Emotions affect the human life in a positive as well as in a negative way. Everyone wants to behave in a controlled way in any given situation but in reality it is not as easy as they desire. This is due to lack of self awareness, self management, social awareness, relationship management as a result it leads to stress .Thus the concept of emotional intelligence is used to reduce stress in women students. Emotional intelligence, as a stress manager, is the ability to manage distressing moods well and controlling impulses; to become motivated; to remain hopeful and optimistic when setbacks towards goals arise. Mayer, Salovey and Caruso (2000) defined EI as a set of abilities that account for how a more accurate understanding of emotions often helps people solve problems in their emotional lives. Goleman (1998) writes www.ijmer.in
149
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
that emotional intelligence include such skills as being able to motivate oneself, being persistent in facing obstacles and achieving goals, controlling impulses and delaying gratification, controlling one’s moods, thinking rationally, empathizing with others and hoping. Emotional intelligence skills enable people to reduce negative stress in their lives, build healthy relationships, communicate effectively, and develop emotional health. Bar-on (1997) defined emotional intelligence as “an array of non-cognitive skills that influence one’s ability to succeed in coping with environmental demands and pressures”. It is made up of five skills namely intrapersonal, inter-personal, adaptability, stress management and general mood (Bar-on 2002). Students who are emotionally intelligent are more resilient to stress and tend to develop positive attitude within themselves. Their interpretive styles of perceiving stress empower or disempower them psychologically and make them resilient to stress. Students with high emotional intelligence have greater frustration tolerance and impulse control which enable them to accept stressful situation as a challenge and, recognize and manage their stressors (Farooq, 2003). Little wonder, Goleman (1995) argues that academic intelligence (IQ) contributes only 20% of success in life, while emotional intelligence (EI) contributes about 80% of success in life including academic. Objectives of the study 1. To measure the emotional intelligent quotient in graduate women students. 2. To analyze the priorities given in different areas in CRT programmes. 3. To identify the frequent stressors in women students. Why emotional intelligence is important to women students? Stress management through EI is helpful to the students irrespective of their gender. As we all know that compared to the male students women students need more attention on EI because in general www.ijmer.in
150
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
women as a daughter is protected by their family, as a wife protected by her husband as a student protected by college incharges,that means women cannot handle the situation at any moment. This attitude should be changed at college level through learning of EI. As Little wonder, Goleman (1995) argues that academic intelligence (IQ) contributes only 20% of success in life, while EI contributes about 80% of success in life including academics. Research methodology This study adopted the survey research design. With a view to eliciting information from respondents, self developed questionnaire was designed using likert five point scale. The instruments have 13 items which measures the respondents’ emotional intelligence quotient. Another source of data collection is through interaction with the women students of various degree colleges in Rajahmundry. A total of 100 questionnaires were distributed to the target population using simple random sampling technique. However, 70 returned upon which the data analysis is based. Data analysis is carried out with measure of central tendency. Results of the study Table 1.Frequency Distribution of Primary Data N=70 S/ N
QUESTIONS
S D
%
D
%
C S
%
A
%
S A
%
1
Other people don’t see me as I see myself.
40
57.14 %
25
35. 71 %
-
-
3
4.28%
2
2.85%
2
I can clearly explain my actions.
-
-
-
-
5
7.14%
2 0
28.57 %
45
64.28 %
3
I can describe accurately
-
-
15
21. 42
1 5
21.42 %
5
7.14%
35
50%
www.ijmer.in
151
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
what I am feeling. Things that happen in my life make sense to me. I am clear about my goals for the future. I can stay calm, even in difficult circumstances . I get irritated by things, other people or myself. I find it easy to “read” other people’s emotions. It’s unpredictable how my friends will feel in any given situation. I am comfortable talking to anyone. I feel uncomfortable when other people get emotional. I have the ability to act according to the situation. I am able to build strong relationships.
% -
-
-
-
2 0
28.57 %
3 0
42.85 %
20
28.57 %
-
-
-
-
3 5
50%
1 5
21.42 %
20
28.57 %
45
64.28 %
20
28. 57 %
5
7.14%
-
-
-
-
15
21.42 %
10
14. 28 %
-
-
2 6
37.14 %
19
27.14 %
30
42.85 %
14
20 %
3
4.28%
1 3
18.57 %
10
14.28 %
35
50%
25
35. 71 %
1 0
14.28 %
-
-
-
-
32
45.71 %
30
42. 85 %
-
-
8
11.42 %
-
-
37
52.85 %
23
32. 85 %
-
-
7
10%
3
4.28%
33
47.14 %
27
38. 57 %
-
-
8
11.42 %
2
2.85%
29
41.42 %
27
38. 57 %
1 4
20%
-
-
-
-
Source: Field Survey, 2014 www.ijmer.in
152
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
SD: Strongly Disagree D: Disagree CS: Cannot Say A: Agree SA: Strongly Agree With respect to the students response 57.14% of the students see themselves as others see them and 35.71% of the students agree that they see themselves as others see them and rest of the students disagree that people don’t see them as they see themselves.64.28% strongly agree , 28.57% agree that that they can clearly explain their actions. About 50% of the students strongly agree that they can explain their feelings.42.85% of students agree that they have the sense that what is going in their life. And 28.57% of students are not able to say what is happening in their life. About half of the students are not clear about their goals and 28.57% of students are clear about their goals regarding their future. From the analysis 64.28% students strongly disagree that they can stay calm in difficult circumstances and 28.57% of students agree that they can’t stay calm in difficult circumstances. It’s about 37.14% of students agree that they get irritated by things, other people or themselves. Majority of the students strongly disagree that it is easy to read the emotions of others. About 50% of the students can predict how their friends behave in any given situation. About 45.71% of the students strongly disagree that they are comfortable talking to anyone.52.85% of the students says that they feel uncomfortable when other people get emotional. About 47.14% of students don’t have the ability to act according to the situation.41.42% of students said that they can’t build strong relationships. Apart from the data source through questionnaire interaction with the students also done. By the interaction with the students of various degree colleges, it was found that the stressors frequently experiencing by majority of the students is low self esteem, guilti, fear due to lack of www.ijmer.in
153
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
confidence, feeling shy, confusion while taking decisions alone these all leads to stress .when asking about the areas focusing in their CRT programme some students said the order of priority as arithmetical aptitude, logical reasoning, English and communication skills, where as some students said the order of priority as communication skills, arithmetical aptitude, logical reasoning, English but they are not giving importance to emotional intelligence area which is more important for academic as well as social success. Discussions and findings From the analysis it is clear that the women students has the ability to recognize their feeling, understanding habitual emotional responses to events and recognizing how emotions affect behavior and performance but they are not clear about their future goals . The students are aware of themselves but they don’t know how to behave in a given situation with controlled emotions, which means lack of self management. And also it is clear that the students have no social awaress as they are not able to understand the emotions of others. And even the students don’t have the ability to maintain strong relations with others. It is also evident that the CRT programme includes soft skill training as per the programme designed by the colleges but in reality there is no much focus on this area. Conclusion and recommendations: On the basis of the findings in this study, it is recommended that awareness should be created on the importance of Emotional Intelligence. There is a need to establish counseling units in colleges to help the students to resolve emotional problems. The educational institutions should give first priority to EI training to improve outcomes both for academic and social success. Altogether as mentioned above will have an impact on women students in decision making, handling the situations in a better way, to avoid the negative www.ijmer.in
154
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
behaviors in their attempts to deal with problems, to improve health, happiness and life success and ultimately help to reduce the stress levels. References 1. Aditya Gupta, G.D. Koolwal, Sanjay Gehlot.Study of perceived stress and emotional intelligence among 1st year medical undergraduates in India, Journal of Contemporary Medical Education 01/2014; DOI: 10.5455/jcme.20131209094837. 2. Joyce G. Walsh- Portillo Florida International University. The Role of Emotional Intelligence in College Students' Success.1011-2011,FLU electronic 3. Saras Ramesar, Pieter Koortzen, Rudolf M. Oosthuizen .The relationship between emotional intelligence and stress management. A j. ind. Psychol. vol.35 n.1 Cape Town Jan. 2009 4. Perceived Emotional Intelligence and Stress Management among Undergraduate Students, N Ugoji, Ife PsychologIA, 20(2), September 2012 5. G. Owolabi Ph.D.Department of Guidance and Counseling Lead City University, Ibadan. Impact of Emotional Intelligence Training on Academic Stress among Secondary School Students in Ibadan Boludola. 6. Joyce G. Walsh- Portillo Florida International University. The Role of Emotional Intelligence in College Students' Success. 7. Logendran mayuran BBA (hons) HRM special, advanced diploma in management accounting (cima), union bank of Colombo plc.Impact of emotional intelligence on stress management: study of schools with banks in Jaffna district.
www.ijmer.in
155
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
ACID ATTACK ON WOMEN: A SERIOUS ISSUE WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO INDIAN JUDICIARY Anitha.K .N Research Scholar Kuvempu University,Shivamogga, Karnataka & Assistant Professor in Law, Government Law College,Ramanagara, Karnataka
Dr. B. S. Reddy Registrar (Evaluation) Karnataka State Law University Hubballi Karnataka
INTRODUCTION: Acid attacks are becoming a growing phenomenon in India. Vitriolage or acid attack means an act of throwing acid on the body of a person with some bad eydikj. In other words, it can be said that acid violence is a deliberate use of acid to attack human beings1. Though acid attack is a crime which can be committed against any man or woman, it has a specific gender dimension in India. Most of the reported acid attacks have been committed on women, particularly young women. The Indian Penal Code, 1860 by virtue of Criminal Law (Amendment) Act, 2013 under the Explanation 1 of Section 326B has defined acid to include, any substance which has acidic or corrosive character of burning nature, capable of causing bodily injury leading to scars or disfigurement or temporary or permanent disability2. According to a proposed scheme drafted by National Commission for Women for relief and rehabilitation of victims of acid violence, the term acid attack means any act of throwing or using acid in any form on the victim with the intention of or with knowledge that such person is likely to cause to the other person, permanent or partial damage or
1
Dr. Harish Verma.(2012). Acid Violence against Women and its Socio-Legal Implications: The Indian Perspective, Civil and Military Law Journal, 48(3), 197-207. 2 See, The Indian Penal Code, 1860. Section 326B - Explanation 1.
www.ijmer.in
156
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
deformity or disfiguration to any part of the body of such person 3. At first contact, acid feels like water on the body, within seconds it causes a burning sensation that quickly becomes increasingly intense4. If not washed of immediately with water, acid can melt away the victim's skin and flesh going as far as dissolving bones. Acid burn victims are found crying in agony until the acid is washed away. It takes 5 seconds of contact to cause superficial burns and 30 seconds to result in full thickness burns 5. REASONS FOR ACID ATTACKS: The most common and obvious reason for such attacks can be referred to as "lover rejection", in which the proposer of the marriage, love or sex is rejected by the victim. Additionally, a report written by a leading organisation in India working on acid violence, ‗the Campaign and Struggle against Acid Attacks on Women (CSAAAW)‘, found that sexual harassment or assault in response to a woman or girl refusing such advances or demanding that the violence stop often precede such attacks.6 Men throw acid on women‘s faces as a mark of their masculinity and superiority, to keep women in their place.7 By deforming a woman‘s face, man derives a sadistic pleasure and his male ego is satisfied. Another prominent reason for such attacks may be 3
Section 3B of the Proposed Scheme drafted by National Commission for Women in India, which maybe called scheme for relief and rehabilitation of offences(by acids) on women and children. 4 See Md. Shahidul Bari & Md. Iqbal Muhmud Choudhury.(2001). Acid Burns in Bangladesh, 14 Annals of Burns & Fire Disasters at 115. 5 Avon Global Centre for Women and Justice at Cornell Law School, the Committee on International Human Rights of the New York City Bar Association, The Cornell Law School International Human Rights Clinic, The Virtue foundation.(2011). Combating Acid Violence in Bangladesh, India and Cambodia. website: www.ohch r.org/Documents/HRBodies/CEDAW/HarmfulPractices/AvonGlobalCentreforWomenan dJustice.pdf. 6 Campaign and Struggle against Acid attacks on women (CSAAAW), Burnt not defeated 21-22(2007) 7 Afroza Anwary,(2003). Acid Violence and Medical Care in Bangladesh: Women’s Activism as Carework, Gender and Society, 17, 305
www.ijmer.in
157
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
related to dowry and other marital disputes. Land or property disputes may also be said to constitute one of the key reasons for the commission of this inhuman crime. The attacks may also occur between unrelated people, due to business disputes, sales disputes, land disputes, or revenge between families . The case of Chennamma Deve Gowda, wife of former Indian Prime Minister H.D Deve Gowda has created sustained and widespread interest on the issue. On 21 February 2001, H.D Lokesh, nephew of the former Prime Minister of India, brutally attacked his aunt with acid in a temple over a family feud. Newspapers reported that it was an act of vengeance between the two families. One reached the top-most position in the country while the other family was facing grinding poverty with six children, including two physically challenged ones8. CONSEQUENCES OF ACID ATTACK: Physical Consequences: Acid burns are amongst the worst injuries that a human being can suffer, solely because of the nature and magnitude of the injuries are wide spread, and mostly require extensive medical treatment. Acid burns through skin and flesh, layer by layer, causing great pain and injury. It eats through the two layers of the skin, into the fat and muscle underneath, and sometimes down to the bone. It may dissolve the bone. The deepness of injury depends on the strength of the acid and the duration of the contact with the skin - the burning continues until the acid is thoroughly washed off with water. Further, if thrown on a person's face, acid rapidly eats into, eyes, ears, nose and mouth. The pain is excruciating, as an intense burning heat cuts through the victims flesh like a hot knife. Eyelids and lips may burn off completely. The nose may melt, closing the nostrils and ears shrivel up. Acid can
8
Jane Welsh.(2009). "It was like burning in hell": A Comparative exploration of acid attack violence, Carolina Papers on International Health, 1-115
www.ijmer.in
158
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
quickly destroy the eye, blinding the victim. Skin and bone on the skull, forehead, cheeks, and chin may dissolve. The acid usually splashes or drips over the neck, chest, back, arms or legs, burning anywhere it touches. The biggest immediate danger for victims is breathing failure. Inhalation of acid vapors can create breathing problems in two ways: i.e. by causing a poisonous reaction in the lungs or by swelling the neck, which constricts the airway and strangles the victim. Psychological Consequences: Psychological consequences of acid violence are even direr as compared to physical consequences. Psychological trauma is caused by both the terror victims suffer during the attack, as they feel their skin burning away, and after the attack by the disfigurement or disabilities that they have to live with for the rest of their lives. This impacts not only the victim, but family, friends and society too. Victims suffer psychological symptoms such as, depression, insomnia, nightmares, fear of other acid attacks and/or fear about facing the outside world, headaches, weakness and tiredness, difficulty in concentrating and remembering things etc. The feeling of lack of hope and worth may never leave them. They further feel perpetually depressed, ashamed, worried and lonely as they are boycotted by the society, which is another sociological issue of the society. Social and Economic Consequences: Unfortunately, there are still families in India who believes in outer beauty than inner Victims who are not still unmarried find difficulty in getting proposals . It is difficult to find jobs either. So far as economic consequences are concerned, such victims face a high degree of discrimination in employment prospects and have to live a depended life full of economic hardships. Their physical scars remind them persistently about the atrocities which have been committed against
www.ijmer.in
159
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
them and the feeling of loneliness and worthlessness never really leave them. LEGAL SCENARIO WITH RESPECT TO ACID ATTACK: The United Nations General Assembly passed the Declaration on the Elimination of Violence against Women in 19939. India has ratified this Declaration and is under an obligation to implement the same. Article 4 (f) of this declaration recommends member states to develop preventive approaches for violence against women by legal measures. This article would further suggest that the quantum of compensation being awarded to the victims of such gruesome and inhuman crime is negligible. There should be separate provisions for granting exemplary damages to the victims of such crime. Furthermore The CEDAW Committee has also recognised that states must act with due diligence to prevent violations of human rights10. Initially there was no specific provision to deal with the menace of vitriolage. The perpetrators of these offence were charged for causing hurt11 or grievous hurt12 using dangerous weapons or means. Causing grievous hurt invites the maximum punishment of life imprisonment and the charge of hurt invites the maximum punishment of three years. But these provisions were insufficient to deal with the perils of acid attack. There are three main reasons behind the samei) the definition of grievous hurt as given under the Indian Penal Code13 is not inclusive of certain circumstances of acid attack as the definition clearly specifies and defines the nature of injuries which
9
Declaration on the Elimination of Violence Against Women, G.A. Res. 48/104, U.N. Doc. A/RES/48/104 (February 2, 1994) 10 Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination Against Women, adopted Dec. 18, 1979, G.A. Res. 34/180, U.N. GAOR, 34th Sess., Supp. No. 46 at 193, U.N. Doc. A/34/46 (1979) [hereinafter CEDAW] 11 Section 324 of the Indian Penal Code, 1860 12 Section 326 of the Indian Penal Code, 1860 13 Section 320 of the Indian Penal Code, 1860
www.ijmer.in
160
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
constitute the offence of grievous hurt. Grievous hurt has been defined as emasculation of the victim‘s reproductive and sexual organs, permanent privation of the sight of either eye, permanent privation of the hearing of either ear, privation of any member or joint, the destruction or permanent impairing of any member or joint, permanent disfiguration of the head or face, fracture or dislocation of a bone or a tooth, and any hurt that endangers life or which causes the sufferer to be during the space of 20 days in severe bodily pain, or unable to follow [her or his] ordinary pursuits. ii) the definition of grievous hurt does not subsume the contempt, sympathy and stigma that the victims of acid violence face and nor does it take into consideration the loss of earning capacity of the victim. iii) if the accused was not charged under grievous hurt, he was penalised under the offence of causing hurt. But causing hurt only invites a meagre punishment of three years which is very inconsequential as compared to the heinous consequences which the victim of acid attack has to face. A new direction was given to the movement against acid attack by the Criminal Law (Amendment) Act of 2013 based on the recommendations of Verma Committee Report which also enunciated the importance of bringing in provision to deal with gravity of this offence14. Section 326A and Section 326B was amalgamated in existing Indian Penal Code and it came into effect from February 3, 2013. Section 326A penalises voluntarily causing grievous hurt by use of acid, etc. It states- Whoever causes permanent or partial damage or deformity to, or burns or maims or disfigures or disables, any part or parts of the body of a person or causes grievous hurt by throwing acid 14
Government of India. Justice Verma Committee Report (2012). Amendments to Criminal Law retrieved from http://ww w.prsindia.org/ uploads/m edia/Ju stice% 20ver ma%20committee/js%20verma%20committe%20report.pdf
www.ijmer.in
161
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
on or by administering acid to that person, or by using any other means with the intention of causing or with the knowledge that he is likely to cause such injury or hurt, shall be punished with imprisonment of either description for a term which shall not be less than ten years but which may extend to imprisonment for life, and with fine: Provided that such fine shall be just and reasonable to meet the medical expenses of the treatment of the victim: Provided further that any fine imposed under this section shall be paid to the victim. Furthermore, Section 326B also penalises the attempt to throw acid. It states whoever throws or attempts to throw acid on any person or attempts to administer acid to any person, or attempts to use any other means, with the intention of causing permanent or partial damage or deformity or burns or maiming or disfigurement or disability or grievous hurt to that person, shall be punished with imprisonment of either description for a term which shall not be less than five years but which may extend to seven years, and shall also be liable to fine. Explanation 1.— For the purposes of section 326A and this section, "acid" includes any substance which has acidic or corrosive character or burning nature, that is capable of causing bodily injury leading to scars or disfigurement or temporary or permanent disability. Explanation 2.— For the purposes of section 326A and this section, permanent or partial damage or deformity shall not be required to be irreversible. Therefore, the new amendment is a welcoming step towards reining in this crime. For the purpose of rehabilitation victims may also be given compensation under Section 357A of the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973 which provides for victim compensation scheme. Another refreshing step which has been brought about by the Amendment Act, 2013 has been integration of Section 357C to the Code of Criminal Procedure which came into effect on February 3, 2013. The Section states that all hospitals, public or private, whether run by the Central Government, the State Government, local bodies or any other person, shall immediately, provide the first-aid or medical treatment, free of cost, to the victims of www.ijmer.in
162
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
any offence covered under section 326A, 376, 376A, 376B, 376C, 376D or section 376E of the Indian Penal Code, and shall immediately inform the police of such incident.". This Section is testimony to the fact that the Government is trying to provide proper first aid and medical healthcare facilities to the victims of acid attack. VI.
ROLE
OF
JUDICIARY
IN
PROSECUTING
THE
PERPETRATORS OF ACID ATTACK: There are cases where culprits were punished ,and in some cases even though the punishment is provided, it was very meagre and in some cases they were let free for want of evidence. In Srimanthula Chinna Sathaiah and Anr. Vs. State of A.P , the accused was suspicious that the other person had falsely 15
implicated him in a case and that his wife was having an affair with the victim’s elder son. As a revenge the accused threw acid on the victim, which resulted in severe acid burns on the face and body. The accused was charged under Section 302 and 34 of the IPC and was awarded rigorous imprisonment for life.In a case before the Supreme Court16 in a dispute between the deceased and accused regarding encroachment, the accused poured acid on the deceased and this caused severe acid burns resulting in death. The main accused was charged under Section 302 of the IPC and awarded rigorous imprisonment for life. n 2013, the Additional Sessions Court on pronounced life sentence on the accused in the heinous acid attack case that snuffed out the life of 23-year old .The acid attack took place in November 2012 and the victim died in February 2013. Accused Suresh Kumar alias Appu was sentenced to life under Section 302 (murder) or under Section 326 (causing grievous hurt by dangerous weapons). The accused would also undergo a concurrent sentence of two years rigorous imprisonment each under
15 16
1998(4) ALD 18 Barati Vs. State of U.P.(AIR 1974 SC 839)
www.ijmer.in
163
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Section 324 (voluntarily causing hurt). In addition, the court slapped a fine of Rs.1 lakh, of which Rs.50,000 would be given as compensation to Vinodhini‘s family.17The relevance of this case lies in the fact that it was decided merely in 4 months which is a huge task for the Indian Courts as it takes years to dispose of the cases. In Devanand Vs.The State 18a man threw acid on his estranged wife because she refused to cohabit with him. The wife suffered permanent disfigurement and loss of one eye. The accused was convicted under Section 307 and was imprisoned for 7 years. In one of the most famous cases19 involving acid attack the accused threw acid on a girl, Hasina, for refusing his job offer. This deeply scarred her physical appearance, changed the colour and appearance of her face and left her blind. The accused was convicted under Section 307 of IPC and sentenced to imprisonment for life. A compensation of Rs. 2,00,000/- in addition to the Trial Court fine of Rs 3,00,000 was to be paid by the accused to Hasina‘s parents. This was a landmark case as it was the first time that a compensation which was quite a large sum was given to the victim to meet the medical expenses including that of plastic surgeries. The case of Laxmi v Union of India & others20, is the testimony to the fact that Supreme Court has taken note of increasing trend in commission of vitriolage and the necessity to curb the same. The Court gave the following guidelines in the instant case[1] Over the counter sale of acid is completely prohibited unless the seller maintains a , to whom it is sole, its quantity and the address of the purchaser.
17
P.V.Srividya,(2013, August 20). Life term for accused in Vindodhini acid attack case. The Hindu. retrieved from http://www.thehindu.com/news/national/tamil-nadu/lifeterm-for-accused-in-vinodhini-acid-attack-case/article5041675.ece 18 (1987 (1) Crimes 314) 19 2005(5) AIR Kar. R 724. (DB) 20 Writ Petition Cri. No. 129 of 2006
www.ijmer.in
164
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
[2] All sellers shall sell acid only after the buyer has shown a photo ID and the purpose for procuring acid. [3]All stocks of acid must be declared by the seller with the concerned Sub-Divisional Magistrate within 15 days. [4] No acid shall be sold to any person who is below 18 years of age. [5] In case of undeclared stock of acid, it will be open to the concerned SDM to confiscate the stock and suitably impose fine on such seller up to Rs. 50,000/[6] The concerned SDM may impose fine up to Rs. 50,000/- on any person who commits breach of any of the above directions. [7] The acid attack victims shall be paid compensation of at least Rs. 3 lakhs by the concerned State Government/Union Territory as the after care and rehabilitation cost.In a 2002 case,21 the accused was suspicious about the character of his wife and inserted mercuric chloride into her vagina, she died due to renal failure. The accused was charged and convicted under Section 302 and 307 IPC. Though the punishment was given it was meagre in some cases. In Ravinder Singh v State of Haryana22 acid was poured on a woman by her husband for refusing to give him divorce. Due to the attack, the victim suffered multiple acid burns leading to her death. The accused was charged and convicted under Section 302 of the IPC. However, life imprisonment was not imposed even though the victim had died. In a case before the Madras High Court ,
23
a person
suspected his wife had developed an illicit relationship with one of his acquaintances. In that fit of anger he threw acid on her resulting in severe burns and death of the victim. The husband was convicted under Sec 302 IPC and 313 IPC (causing miscarriage of a woman without her 21
Marepally Venkata Sree Nagesh Vs. State of A.p ( 2002 CriLJ3625) Ravinder Singh v State of Haryana AIR 1975 SC 856 23 Balu Vs. State Represented Inspector of police decided on 26/10/2006
22
www.ijmer.in
165
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
consent) with life imprisonment and a fine of Rs. 2000. The fine was thus again a meager amount. In a case before the Jharkhand High Court
24
the victim was standing with her friend at a Bus Stop in
Dhanbad. The Appellant came and poured acid .The appellant had a photograph of the victim and was blackmailing her but she refused to accede to his demands. The victim suffered burn injuries over the left side of her eye, neck and chest and had to be hospitalized. A case was registered under Sections 324, 326, 307 IPC. The learned 2nd Additional Sessions Judge, Dhanbad held the appellant guilty under Section 324 IPC and convicted and sentenced him to undergo RI for three years. The appellant’s conviction was upheld by the Hon’ble High Court. No compensation whatsoever was awarded to the victim. In this case the court seems to have been guided by the nature of injuries which in its opinion did not amount to grievous hurt. 25 In State(Delhi Administration) v. Mewa Singh
26
the accused threw acid on the
victims face. The liquid splashed or her face produced some redness on the skin over a part of her face involving her upper eye-lids. There was no corrosion, of the skin or other deformity. The accused was convicted for causing hurt under Section 323 of the IPC and a meagre fine of Rs. 300 along with 15 days imprisonment was awarded. In Syed Shafique Ahmed Vs. State of Maharashtra
27
personal enmity with his wife
was the reason behind a gruesome acid attack by the husband on his wife as well as another person . This caused disfiguration of the face of both the wife as well as that of the other person and loss of vision of right eye of wife. The accused was charged under Section 326 and 324 of the IPC and was awarded Rs5000 as fine and 3 years imprisonment. In a 1998 Maharashtra case
28
acid was thrown on a woman, while
24
Awadhesh Roy Vs. State of Jharkhand (Decided on 12/6/2006) Students of A.P.A.U and Miss Anuradha, Student Vs The Registrar, A.P.A.U, N.Sreeniwasa Reddy, Student and Ors. (1997(1) ALT 547) 26 State(Delhi Administration) v. Mewa Singh 5(1969) DLT 506 27 2002 CriLJ1403 28 Gulab Sahiblal Shaikh Vs. The State of Maharashtra, (1998 Bom CR(Cri)) 25
www.ijmer.in
166
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
she was holding her two and a half year old baby, by her brother-in-law for refusing to give money to maintain her husband’s second wife. She sustained acid burns on the left side of her face, left hand and left breast and both she and her infant daughter lost their eyesight. The woman finally died due to burn injuries. In this case, the brother-in-law was sentenced by the Court under Section 302 of IPC, to undergo imprisonment for life and pay a fine of Rs. 1000 and also sentenced to rigorous imprisonment for a month. Under Section 326 of the IPC he was awarded 5 years of imprisonment apart from a fine of Rs. 2000/and 3 months of rigorous imprisonment. Though the accused was found guilty the learned Judge failed to appreciate that he should levy an adequate amount as fine and give this fine to the victim’s child, who suffered from the attack in multiple ways. In some cases the accused were let free for want of proper evidence. In a case before the Calcutta High Court29 the accused had made a previous abortive attempt to throw acid on the victim and succeeded on a second attempt. The motive for the crime was revenge as the victim had rebuffed the overtures of the main accused Ramesh. The accused along with two others went to the victims house and threw a bottle of acid on the victim outside her house where she, her mother, her aunt and her little son were sitting. The victim, her mother, her aunt and her son sustained injury. The victim Padma died due to extensive acid burns on the neck, chest, right alna, breasts, legs, knees and scalp. Her aunt received 25% burns and her aunt’s son received 11% burns. The additional sessions Judge awarded imprisonment for life and a fine for Rs. 5000 under Section 302 and 34 of the IPC. The appellants were also convicted under S. 324/34 IPC and sentenced to R.I. for one year and to pay a fine of Rs. 1,000/- each in default to suffer S.I. for two months. Both sentences were to run concurrently. The High Court on appeal however, set aside the conviction and sentence 29
Ramesh Dey and Ors. vs. State of West Bengal, Decided on 16/5/2007
www.ijmer.in
167
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
against the other two accused by stating that there was no evidence to show they had a common intention and their presence with the accused on the scene of the crime was not enough.In case before the Supreme Court of India30 the accused was the husband of the deceased, Sushila and wanted to kill her and their daughters, Bindu and Nandini to grab property as he was the immediate beneficiary to her estate. He poured acid over her to kill her. She received extensive burn injuries on large parts of their bodies including the face, chest, neck, etc. According to the Doctor the death was due to the corrosive acid burns and shock. The High Court convicted the appellants Ram Charittar and Kishori Lal under Section 302/34 IPC, and sentenced them to life imprisonment. The appeal for their acquittal was dismissed by the Hon’ble Supreme Court. No compensation was awarded to the victims. In another case 31 before the Madras High Court a nurse and a compounder conspired and poured a mixture of acid and kerosene over a doctor as revenge for an alleged rape by him of the nurse. The doctor sustained 100% burn injuries and later expired due to them. The accused were charged under Sec 302 and 109 of the IPC but were acquitted for the lack of evidence.
CONCLUSION: Although commencement of law reforms in the acid attack legislation is a positive sign, yet there is a long way to go, as to effectively implement these provisions. Though it is admitted that once a new legislation is enacted, it takes time to settle and is subsequently evolved by the dynamism of judiciary, but some of the short comings, faced prima facie needs to be addressed. The current acid attack provisions and judicial approach on the quantum of damages is very
30 31
Ram Charittar and Anr. etc. vs. State of Uttar Pradesh etc. (04.04.2007 - SC) Mahesh and Parimaladevi Vs. State, Decided on 10/4/2003 by the Madras High Court
www.ijmer.in
168
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
restricted in view of the nature and the gravity of the offence. The first aid and the medical treatment, including cosmetic surgeries etc. are very expensive. Although compensation cannot rehabilitate the victims of such a brutal crime, yet it can atleast enable her to seek the best treatment possible. Furthermore, the police and judiciary should be more gender sensitive. Video trial should further be made mandatory in the acid attack legislation, making it easier for the victim to participate in the same. Another important aspect, which requires immediate consideration are the formulation of new rehabilitation schemes. Better job opportunities, training etc. should be imparted to the victims of such crimes, enabling them to atleast meet their day to day livelihood needs. Furthermore, more NGO's and international organization should boot up against acid attacks, hosting awareness campaigns etc. By adopting policies such as safe handling and labeling of acid, companies can also contribute to reduce number of acid attack. In cases of acid attack, a new provisions should be incorporated in the Indian Evidence Act as Section 114B which should raise a presumption that if a person has thrown acid on another person, it has been done with the intention of causing, or with the knowledge that such an act is likely to cause such hurt or injury. A value-based education is the need of the hour, enactment of new laws, creating institutions and lip service to provide reservation will not take care of the evil. It is time to seriously ponder over these questions. It would be a good recommendation to frame a new law to give compensation in offences relating to women like, rape, sexual attack, acid attack etc.
www.ijmer.in
169
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
EFFECT OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES AND YOGIC PRACTICES ON FLEXIBILITY Dr. C. Kiran Chakravarthi Teaching Assistant Dept. of Physical Education & Sports Sciences Sri Krishnadevaraya University Anantapuramu Introduction: Result of Physical inactivity leads to reduced in range of motion. So shortness of tonic muscles aggregates the weakness of muscles. For safety and functionality of stretch of the muscles should improved flexibility. Flexibility means the elasticity of soft-tissues that cross or surround joint; muscles, tendons, fascia, articular cap- sule, ligments, nerves, blood vessels and skin. It is enormously required for painless of the movement of the body and preventive measures of muscle and tendon strains. Flexibility is strongly related by functional range of motion. Flexibility has improved and quickly achieved through the regular practice of yoga. The present study examines the significant improvement of regular yogic practice on flexibility in young females. Materials and Methods: Sixty young females of Master of Physical Education students in Sri Krishnadevaray University, Anantapuramu, India were randomly recruited as subjects and their age ranged between 22yrs t o 2 4 y r s . They were divided into three groups of twenty each namely, group A, group B and group C. The first two groups were experimental groups and the third group was www.ijmer.in
170
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
control. The experimental group A underwent a designed yogic practice for three months and similarly, the group B was treated with designed physical exercises. The control group did not undergo any special training. Designed Yogic Practices (Group-A): Asana – Padmasana, vajrasana, Paschimothanasana, Matsyasana, Artha Matsyendrasana, Halasana, Bhujangasana,Dhanurasana, Salabhasana, Sarvangasana, Pawanamuktasana, Chakrasana, Utthital Parvakonasana, Virabhadrasana, Utkatasana, Vrksasana, Tadasana,Garudasana,Shavasana. Pranayama - Nadisuddhi, Nadi Shodhana, Ujjayi, Kapalabhati, Bhramari, hastrika,Sitalai, Sitakari. Meditation - Observing the breath Designed Physical Exercises (Group-B): Lateral, front, back neck stretch, Double anterior shoulder stretch, Overhead shoulder stretch,Lateral trunk stretch, Trunk and leg stretch, Quadriceps’s stretch, Hip flexor stretch and Hamstring stretch The collected data of flexibility performance was measured by Sit and reach test in centimeters before and after the twelve weeks of training of the two experimental and Control group. The maximum distance reached to the nearest 0.5cm was recorded as score. The obtained pre and post-test values were analyzed using Analysis of co-variance (ANCOVA) for statistical signifi Schefee’s Post hoc-test was utilized to fi out the best among the three groups. From the table 1, the pre-test and post – test mean flexibility of the three groups namely Control group (Group-C), Yogic practice group
(Group-A)
www.ijmer.in
and
Physical exercise group (Group-B) 171
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
did not differ signifi (P> 0.05). The adjusted post-test for mean flexibility of the three groups done by ANCOVA showed that the mean flexibility differed significant among the three groups (P<0.001) and the results of Post-hoc test reveals that yogic practice group (Group – A) is the better among the three with 20.37cm statistical significant. The findings support the study of Herbert & Datt Chug (2012), Hubert Kedarnath (2008) and Yogananda (1996) with designed yogic practices package has made a significant impact on the flexibility. Analysis of Covariance of Flexibility
Test
Pretest Posttest
Group Means Yogic Physical practic exercise e group group 15.90 15.10 19.95
18.20
Adjust 20.37 ed
19.38
Source of variance Con trol gro up 18.05 B / G W/G 18.45 B / G W/G
Sum of square
Mean df square FSignific ratio ance
93.10 2170.55 35.83 2139.10
2 46.55 57 38.08 2 17.92 57 37.53
1.22 0.30
16.85 B / G W/G
128.16 212.29
2 64.08 56 3.79
16.9 0.00 0*
0.48 0.62
post test
*Significancenificant at0.001 level Conclusion: The results of this study confirm that regular yogic practice as a significant effect on flexibility on young females. So improvement of flexibility is preventive treatment of muscles and tendon strains. So simple stretching through yogic practices can potentially lengthen the lifespan of muscle References www.ijmer.in
172
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
1. Giri (2012)”Effect of Using a Set of Yogic Exercises on Five Tests of National Physical Efficiency” 2. Iyangar, B.K.S. (2010). Yoga- The Path to Holistic Health, Dorling Kindersley Limited, Great Britain. 3. Jay, H. (2011). Physiological aspects of Sports training and Performance, Human Kinetics 4. Smithless and Cameron (2009), “Principles of Evaluation in Education”, New York: Harper Brothers Publication. 5. Hurbert Dhanaraj (1974) “effect of yoga and 5bx fitness plan on selected physiological parameters”, Canada: Ph.D., Thesis university of Alberta,adamanton,p.31. 6. Prasad (1996),”An Evaluation of yoga system of physical education”,Doctoral thesis,Abstract in completed research in health,physical Education and recreation.
www.ijmer.in
173
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
QUALITY TEACHER EDUCATION-PROS AND CONS Dr. N. Sita Rama Krishna Rao Principal Yalamarty College of Education Visakhapatnam Andhra Pradesh Introduction Teachers are the back bone of the society and every teacher must possess and follow the code of conduct and have abundant knowledge. In today’s fast changing scenario of privatization, liberalization and globalization, the students are expected to be highly skilled in their fields. The basic education they receive at school plays a significant role in molding their personalities and also in imparting skills. Communication is one such skill they need to possess. How teach different subjects and the methods of teaching are taught in Teacher Educational Institutions. "A teacher should have control over his senses. He should not get any evil thought when he is alone." - Swami Vivekananda
“Those who educate children well are more to be honored than parents, for these only gave life, those the art of living well.”
Aristotle.
"Reading makes a full man, Conference a ready man and Writing an exact man". Lord Bacon
www.ijmer.in
174
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Role of Teacher Educational Institutions With the rise in population there has been comparative rise in the number of schools, to that of the enrolment in the schools. In the past, there were only a few Teacher Educational Institutions like RIE (Regional Institute of Education) at Mysore in South India later only at Universities with a low outcome of teachers per year. To enhance this government has taken steps to license the private colleges to train D.Ed., B.Ed., and M.Ed, graduates. Colleges, Universities and degreegranting institutions of higher education also play their roles in promoting knowledge. In the original sense of the word, a college was a group of students who gathered to share academic and residential facilities. Each college was a component part of a corporate body called a university, the word being an abbreviation of the Latin universities magistrorum et scholarium ("guild [or union] of masters and students"), organized for mutual advantage and legal protection. Today a college may be affiliated with a university or independent stature. In some universities, particularly European institutions, students begin their higher education with specialized studies because their general education is completed in secondary school. In general, European universities have no prescribed courses, attendance requirements, or course grades. Students may attend lectures, but do their work directly with tutors who prepare them for examinations. Programmes may be completed in two to six years, usually split into three terms. In the United States, students are traditionally required to take general survey courses before they specialize in major areas of concentration; the undergraduate programme generally lasts four years, with each year split into two or three semesters. Typical degrees include the Bachelor of Arts (B.A.), Bachelor of Science (B.Sc.) degree and Bachelor of Commerce (B. Com) while those www.ijmer.in
175
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
who want additional education may enroll in programmes leading to a Master degree either it may be M. A / M.Com or M.Sc. or M.Phil. degree and further to pursue for a Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) degree. Role of Teacher Educational Institutions in Uplifting Quality A great scholar rightly mentions that "We are in the ocean of Information, but we lack knowledge" Reverend former president of India Dr A.P.J. Abdul Kalam writes in his essay "Knowledge Society" that "Knowledge is everywhere". Then what is knowledge? Knowledge is information. Information is everywhere, if you store the information which is around you in your brain, it is nothing but knowledge. A person who talks aptly about different topics we say that he has lot of knowledge. It is the foremost duty of the educational institutions to provide information which is very indispensable for imparting the information prescribed for a particular class either it may be in Primary, Secondary or Higher education. Teacher Training Teacher Education is a Training and Preparation of individuals enabling them to become professional teachers in good, well equipped Teacher Educational Institutions. special skills and abilities are necessary to succeed in the teaching profession. Ancient and medieval societies lacked institutions offering instruction in the principles and practices of teaching. Those intending to become teachers were required only to demonstrate knowledge of the subjects they desired to teach. The earliest-known educational institution to offer a systematic programme of teacher training was the Institute of the Brothers of the Christian Schools, which was established in 1685 at Reims, France, by the French priest St John Baptist de la Salle. In the 18th century other www.ijmer.in
176
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
such institutions were begun in France and Germany. A governmentsponsored school established in France in 1794 was the first to follow the principles of the philosopher Jean-Jacques Rousseau. Rousseau believed that educators should concern themselves primarily with the mental and physical development of their pupils and only secondarily with subject matter. This principle was later adopted in a number of teacher-training schools throughout the world. One important educator who applied and developed the pedagogical theories of Rousseau was the late 18th-century Swiss educational reformer Johann Heinrich Pestalozzi. An important advance in teacher-training theories and methods was made in Prussia early in the 19th century with the application of the views of the educator Johann Friedrich Herbart. He stressed the study of the psychological processes of learning as a means of devising educational programmes based on the aptitudes, abilities, and interests of students. Important contributions were made to teaching theory in the 20th century by the Swiss psychologist Jean Piaget and the American psychologist Jerome Bruner. Methods, Approaches and Techniques to be followed The student teacher is to be imparted with various methods, approaches and techniques of teaching as opted in his/her methodology. Approach: An approach deals with assumptions. It is a method to “go near” to the student. To illustrate, let us consider Aural-Oral Approach which is based on the following assumptions: Language is human, aural-oral and symbolically meaningful, Any given language is structured uniquely The structure of a language can be systematically described.
As the approach believes in the assumptions that language is structured and the structure of a language
www.ijmer.in
177
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
can be systematically described, the relatively the procedural assumptions are that: Languages are habits, Habits are established by repetition and Languages must be taught through repetition are advocated.
The Structural Approach, the Audio-Lingual Approach and the Communicative Approach slightly differ on how these aspects are interpreted and understood.
Method: "A method determines what and how much is taught, the order in which it is taught and how the meaning and form are conveyed and what is done to make use of the language unconscious". W.F. Mackey From the above statement we can conclude that a method includes selection, gradation, presentation and repetition of the instructional material. Techniques: Micro Teaching was first introduced at Stanford University in 1960 by Allen and others. Since its introduction, there has been a very dramatic growth in the use of Micro Teaching. It is a scaled down procedure. The teaching situation is simplified, the teacher's task is facilitated and made very specific, the length of the lesson is shorted, and the size of the class is reduced. Micro teaching analyses the complex task of teaching into limited but well defined components that can be defined, observed, practiced, evaluated and controlled. It emphasizes on small steps giving quick and regular reinforcement. Micro-Teaching is thus a training technique which every student teacher has to master. Iris Paintal (1980) has suggested the following steps for micro lesson practice:
www.ijmer.in
178
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
1. A teacher teaches a short lesson of about 5-10 minutes duration, for a small group of 5-10 students. 2. He concentrates on one practicing one specific skill in a small unit of content. 3. He receives feedback immediately after teaching from a supervisor or a critique and peers or from self appraisal devices. 4. He re-plans her lesson in the light of the suggestions received and then re-teaches his lesson to a different group of students or peers. 5. He again receives feedback and resumes the cycle of teaching feedback and re-teach till the supervising / peer group is satisfied with her performance. The diagrammatic representation of the above points is shown below.
There are several skills a teacher student has to learn before stepping into a classroom to teach a topic or lesson. The basic five skills are 1) Motivation, 2) Explanation and Narration 3) Illustrating with Examples 4) Probing questions and 5) Blackboard usage. Apart from these basic skills a teacher has to learn the following skill: Lecturing, Demonstration, Action, miming, Class room Management & Organization Instructional objectives, introducing a lesson, Stimulus variation, Reinforcement Silence and Non-verbal clues, Probing
www.ijmer.in
179
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
question, Explaining, Illustrating with examples Using Blackboard, Using audio Visual aids, Closure.
Quality Concerns in Teacher Education: As there is a tremendous change and growth in every field, new designs, technology, procedures, products, courses of and study along with new problems of educations institutions can be seen. Teacher education institutions are under pressure to improve quality. Societies which follow technological development expect students not only to have domain-specific skills, but the generic ability to adapt to new circumstances. Graduates can no longer thrive simply by knowing what or even knowing how, they will increasingly depend on what they now but on their ability to find out to learn. Teachers either trainees or educators have to be active in learning, engage in interdisciplinary problem solving, and developing independence and integrity which acting with interdependent learning communities. These changes require teachers not only to acquire new knowledge and skills but also to develop them continuously. www.ijmer.in
180
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
To equip the teaching body with skills and competences for its new roles, it is necessary to have both high-process of continuous professional development keeping teachers up to date with the skills required in the knowledge based society. Applying Quality Approaches in Teacher Education Quality Approach is the process through which an institution develops its internal capacity to be most effective in its mission and to sustain itself over the long term. To improve the quality, the institutions must start with reviewing the mission, vision and goals and the various academic and administrative units moving to an assessment of current levels of performance, based on self studies, external reviews and strategic planning. Teachers Education should:
Focus on the system completely
Have proper preparation of the activities to make the system wide, and permanent change in the institution
Have the support of the management
Take
long
term
approach
to
improve
the
institution's
performance and efficiency
Combine research and experience to understand people, business systems and their interactions.
Monitor the progress of learning of the trainee teachers.
Challenges in Implementing Quality in Teacher Education: Impact of Information Communication and Technology Globalization Privatization
www.ijmer.in
181
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
1. The progress made in information Communication and Technology is believed to be a revolution with profound influence on economic development. When one observes keenly on teacher education, there seems to have been an uncanny lack of influence and far less change than other fields have experienced. The teacher educational institutions are therefore, forced to constantly update their roles and designs, strategies for identifying or competing with, accommodating, selecting, influencing or otherwise offsetting aspects of the impact of modern technology. 2. Due to globalization in every field there is an impact over the curriculum and the subjects to be taught and learned. It has its impact on teacher education too. 3. The increasing population and growing demand for admissions, the problems of providing adequate funds for higher and professional courses provided by the central and state governments allowed the entry of private enterprises to set up self-financing institutions and this helps the governments to share the burden. Due to privatization, the cost issues such as budgetary allocation, cost analysis, cost effectiveness, accountability, facilities and programmes are demanded of institutional systems. Hence, teacher educational institutions must respond to these challenges. Need to Grow Competition in Teacher Education There is every need for teacher education institutions to cultivate a fierce competitive environment in all its activities. There should be competition to attract students, to recruit and retain faculty, to secure educational and research funding, technology as well as knowledge- based services. Hence, there is a clear need for teacher education institutions to actively pursue strategic alliances with domestic and international organizations to improve competitive advantages. www.ijmer.in
182
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Quality
Implementation
and
Improvisation
in
Teacher
Education Alvin Toffler in his book 'Future Shock' says 'Change is the process by which future invades our lives'. The field of teacher education has turned upside down and change seems to be avalanching upon our heads. The teacher educational institutions have to implement strategic programme: To become more flexible. To adapt to the changing environment To increase responsiveness to clients To increase staff morale and To develop new managerial skills and strategies Shared Vision: Proactive leadership and administrative support from the entire system is needed. In addition to this, the collaborative environment necessary for creating a shared vision also needed to sustain that vision. Implementation and Assessment to maintain Quality: There should be continuous assessment of the effectiveness of the strategies. This continuous assessment should provide information regarding the strategies used potential problem, and data for altering policies and strategies. This can be done by analysis, a careful evaluation of an organization and threats, strengths and weakness as well as its environmental opportunities and threats. In SWOT analysis, the best strategies accomplish an organization’s mission by: Exploiting organizations opportunities, strengths Neutralizing its threats and
www.ijmer.in
183
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Avoiding its weaknesses (Manpower grooming)
Faculty
Development
Any educational institution is known by its people and is made or marred by its people. Manpower can be groomed with knowledge, skills, attitude, behavior, character, motivation and orientation. Problems in Teacher Education: There are many challenges worthy of noting. There is need for higher student enrolment by motivating student in Teacher Education through the supply of training materials and real practice. 1. Lack
of
participatory
framework: When educational
reforms are dictated by policy makers without generating it from the people directly involved creates problems of ownership, sustainability and lack of awareness on the part of those meant to implement the program. 2. Poor Planning: Executing program without adequate planning of necessary conditions and infrastructure. 3. Lack of Capacity: The need for requisite manpower and infrastructure are necessary in attainment of goals. 4. Lack of Political Will: Many programs fail due to the lack of political will in the area of adequate funding and follow-up. 5. Status quo syndrome: Negative attitude towards change and the belief that established modes of operation and practices must be maintained e.g., slowness in adoption of E-classroom. 6. Absolute
curricula
/
Infrastructure:
Delay
in
implementation of policy and poor funding makes products of Teacher Education to be far from acquiring the needed skills. 7. Slow Enrolment: Very slow student enrolment is also a crucial problem in the present scenario of Teacher Education. www.ijmer.in
184
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
8. Very Poor Teaching Learning Environment: Very poor teaching and learning environment e.g. tumbledown classroom and lecture theatres, noisy surroundings e.g., the college is near a factory or a heavy traffic road or near a railway track. 9. Poor Quality of Academic Staff: The best brains look for greener pasture. If the academic staff is efficient, then the quality in teaching would be rich as a result teacher education would be better. Challenges in Teacher Education 1. Problem of Selection: Faulty method of selection procedure leads to deterioration of the quality of teachers. Better selection method would not only improve the quality of training but also save the personal and social wastage. Some suggestions are mentioned: 1 .Candidates should be interviewed; 2. Test of General Knowledge should be applied. 3. Test of language. 4. Test of intelligence should be administered. 5. Aptitude, interest administered.
and
attitude inventory
should
be
6. A well directed guidance service should be provided. 2. Lack of adequate knowledge of language: Most of the student teachers are incapable of using mother tongue and the second language (English) due to which they are unable to communicate either in spoken or written form. 3. Deficiencies of small time period provided for Teacher Training: The effective time being of eight to nine months not
www.ijmer.in
185
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
adequate for teacher training. The main purpose of teacher education programme is to develop healthy attitude, broad based interest and values. It is not possible during the short duration of nine months. 4. Inadequate opportunity to develop competency: The current teacher training programme does not provide adequate opportunities to the student teachers to develop competency because the organizers of teacher training programme are not aware of the existing problems of schools. 5. Problems of Practice Teaching: The ratio of marks between theory and practice generally remains of 5:2 although teaching practice plays a significant role in B.Ed., programme. In spite of all kinds of elaborate arrangements regarding practice in teaching, student teachers are non-serious to the task of teaching, deficient in sense of duty, irresponsible, aimless, indifferent to children, lacking innovative measure in teaching are great obstacles in the development of pedagogical skills. 6. Problems of Supervision of Teaching: The supervisory organizations for practice teaching aims at bringing improvement in the instructional activity of the student teachers by using various techniques and practical skills in teaching and help them to develop confidence, in facing the classroom situations. 7. Supervision before classroom teaching: If the lesson plans are checked superficially and no discussion is made by the method specialist there is chance for improper presentation. Hence, proper check to the lesson plan format is to be done scrupulously. 8. Supervision during classroom teaching: It is done by teachers who are not method specialist generally. These www.ijmer.in
186
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
supervisors offer descriptive type of criticism while constructive type is desirable. Their remarks are related to the general personality of the student teachers. The percentage of lessons supervised by the method specialist varies due to faulty staffing pattern, lack of time, too many lessons to be supervised, defective time table etc. 9. Lack of subject knowledge: The B.Ed., programme does not emphasize the knowledge of the basic subject. The whole teaching practice remains indifferent with regard to the subject knowledge of the student teacher. The student-teacher of the concerned methodology does not find any scope during the B.Ed, programme to improve his subjective knowledge. 10. Faulty method of teaching: Though there is a tremendous improvement in technology teacher educators are averse to innovation and experimentation in the use of methods of teaching. Their acquaintance with modern class-room communication devices is negligible. Innovative method of teaching is to be adopted for the improvement of teacher education. 11. Poor academic background of student - teachers: The students who join B.Ed, colleges have poor academic background. There are hardly countable numbers of students who can speak and write grammatically error free language, due to improper foundation in the schooling. In most of the student teachers and they also face language problem, they do not have a sound academic background for a well deserved entry in the teaching profession. 12. Lack of facilities for professional development: The programmes
are
being
unimaginative manner. www.ijmer.in
conducted
in
a
routine
and
Even the association of teacher 187
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
educators has not contributed anything towards development of a sound professionalization of teacher education in the country. 13. Unable to prepare and use right teaching learning material: It is observed the most of the student-teachers do not prepare and take any sort of TLM while going for teaching practice. The Student-teachers have to know the types of different TLM. Every teacher Educational Institution has to pay greater importance to teach the student-teachers how to make and use Audio-Visual aids. The following table shows the variety of teaching aids that can be used in a class.
www.ijmer.in
188
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
NCERT Classification of Teaching Aids Projected Aids
Films Film strips Opaque projectors O.H.P Slides
Non-Projected Aids Graphic Display Aids Boards Charts Blackboard Cartoons Bulletin Comics Flannel Diagrams Magnetic Flash Cards Peg board Graphs Maps Photographs Pictures Posters
3-D Aids Models. Mockups Objects Specimens Diagrams Puppets
Audio Aids
Activity Aids
Radio Recordings Television
Demonstration Dramatics Experiments Computer Assisted Instruction Programmed Instruction Teaching Machines
Classification of Teaching Aids based on Type of Projection Visual Aids Projected Aids Silent Motion Pictures Film strips Magic Lanterns Micro Projections Slide Projections Opaque and Overhead Projectors
www.ijmer.in
Non-Projected Aids 1. Different types of boards - Black board, Flannel Magnetic board, Bulletin board, Peg board etc. 2. Display material, photographs, posters, maps, graphs. 3. Models, specimens. 4. Books, Illustrations.
board, charts,
189
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Classification of Teaching Aids based on Motion Static Aids Flash Cards. 2. Charts. 3. Slides. 4. OHPs, Epidiascope. 5. Microscope. 1.
Dynamic Aids 1. Working Models. 2. Motion Pictures. 3. Television 4. Computers.
Classification of Teaching Aids based on Dimensions of Objects Based on the visibility dimensions of the objects, aids are classified into two types.
Two Dimensions Aids: In these aids only 2 dimensions i.e., length and width or length and height are only visible.
3-D Aids: In these aids all the 3 dimensions of length, breadth and height are visible.
Conclusion Apart from these, Teacher Educational Institutions have to make the student-teachers to identify which are learned skills and intuitive skills. Quality Implementation & Improvisation in Teacher Education is the success of Teacher Educational System largely depend upon the Quality of Teachers. The Quality of Teachers depends upon the Quality of Teacher Education. Teacher plays a vital role in developing the society. Teacher education today forms an integral part of any Educational system. It should not be forgotten that the quality of school teacher depends on the training he receives from the training institutions and allowing teacher education to rot adversely impacts education sector. Therefore quality teacher will positively impact the education sector as whole.
www.ijmer.in
190
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
References 1. Bajaj. K.K (2008) "Challenges in Teacher Education: Issue of professional Development' Univeristy News. Vol 46 (15). 2. Ch. Annie Vijaya Kumari (2004) Methods of Teaching English, New Era Publications, Guntur. 3. Dr.D. Vasundhara & Dr.Katyayani R.K.(2006) Methodology of Teaching English, Published by Telugu Akademi, Hyderabad, 4. Prof. A. Jagadeesh (2004) Micro Teaching Theory & Practice, Siddanna Educational Society, Mahabub Nagar, Andhara Pradesh. 5. Education Technology, New Era Publiccations. 6. Suresh Chandra Sharma (2013) Edu Tracks AMonthly Scanner of Trends in Education - Journal ISSN: 0972-9844, Neelkamal Publications Pvt. Ltd, Hyderabad.
www.ijmer.in
191
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
AN OVER-VIEW ANALYSIS OF SUICIDE – ITS USE IN INDIA Reni Pal Assistant Professor in Philosophy Surendranath College, Kolkata All our actions can broadly be divided into two sects – what we spontaneously do and what we should do. Ethics is concerned with the latter. Ethics is one of the main subdivisions of philosophy, which is the study of general and fundamental problems concerning matters such as existence, knowledge, truth, beauty, law, justice, validity, mind, and language. Ethics deals with the standards by which human actions can be judged right or wrong. One of the major subject areas of ethics is applied ethics, which attempts to apply ethical theories to real-life situations. Suicide becomes one of the most important and discussed topics of applied ethics in recent years. Suicide (Latin suicidium, from sui caedere, to kill oneself) is the intentional taking of one’s own life. It is any form of self-killing, where self-killing is understood as acting in such a way as to bring about one's own death. The last decision is always taken by the suicide (agent) to kill himself. Prior to the late nineteenth century, suicide was legally defined as a criminal act in most Western countries. According to Durkheim, Suicide is the death resulting directly or indirectly from a positive or negative act of the victim himself, which he knows will produce this result. In the social climate of the early 2000s, however, suicidal behavior is most commonly regarded and responded to as a psychiatric emergency. Suicide may occur for a number of reasons, including mental disorders, grief, depression, shame, guilt, stress, desperation, physical pain, emotional pressure, anxiety, financial difficulties, unrequited love, or to escape undesirable situations. But the general ground of suicide is utter loneliness and feeling of being rejected by the whole world. www.ijmer.in
192
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Whenever a person takes the decision of committing suicide, he authentically believes that he has not found any point for living further. He thinks that he becomes absolutely valueless. This type of feeling can better be described as psychological bankruptcy. Over 90 percent of people who die by suicide have a mental illness at the time of their death. And the most common mental illness is depression. Untreated depression is the number one cause for suicide. Untreated mental illness (including depression, bipolar disorder, schizophrenia, and others) is the cause for the vast majority of suicides. Also, some people are genetically predisposed to depression, and thus they may not appear to be undergoing any negative life experiences, yet still become depressed, and may die by suicide. Some of the negative life experiences that may cause depression, and some other causes for depression, include:
The death of a loved one.
A divorce, separation, or breakup of a relationship.
Losing custody of children, or feeling that a child custody decision is not fair.
A serious loss, such as a loss of a job, house, or money.
A serious illness.
A terminal illness.
A serious accident.
Chronic physical pain.
Intense emotional pain.
Loss of hope.
Being victimized (domestic violence, rape, assault, etc).
www.ijmer.in
193
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
A loved one being victimized (child murder, child molestation, kidnapping, murder, rape, assault, etc.).
Physical abuse.
Verbal abuse.
Sexual abuse.
Unresolved abuse (of any kind) from the past.
Feeling "trapped" in a situation perceived as negative.
Feeling that things will never "get better."
Feeling helpless.
Serious legal problems, such as criminal prosecution or incarceration.
Feeling "taken advantage of."
Inability to deal with a perceived "humiliating" situation.
Inability to deal with a perceived "failure."
Alcohol abuse.
Drug abuse.
A feeling of not being accepted by family, friends, or society.
A horrible disappointment.
Feeling like one has not lived up to his or her high expectations or those of another.
Bullying. (Adults, as well as children, can be bullied.)
Low self-esteem.
www.ijmer.in
194
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Two things are needed to commit suicide – sincere intention and sincere attempt. Now the question arises – how to commit suicide? Broadly speaking, there are two ways of suicide – (I) committing suicide by omission or inaction and (II) committing suicide through action or commission. The first type of suicide is happened by not doing anything to save life. It is a negative act when one does not do what is necessary to escape death such as refusing life-saving drugs, not leaving a burning building etc. The second type of suicide is occurred by fatal self-inflicted destructive act with explicit or inferred intent to die. It means taking direct action to kill oneself. The unfortunate and depressing issue of suicide has become a staggering piece of harsh reality in today's world. Normally the methods are taking help of fire, intentional starvation, intentional drowning, electrocution, hanging, jumping from a high place, jumping before a moving heavy vehicle, taking overdose of sleeping pills, taking poison, shooting on self, cutting one’s throat or wrist etc. Suicide has become a serious issue for many countries.The ways in which people decide to shuffle this mortal coil are numerous and varying. Ten of the most often seen are as follows: 1. Drowning 2. Electric Shock 3. Exsanguinations 4. Jumping 5. Suffocation 6. Carbon Monoxide Inhalation 7. Poisoning 8. Hanging www.ijmer.in
195
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
9. Drug / Alcohol Overdose 10. Gun Shot According to official statistics, about a million people die by suicide annually, more than those murdered or killed in war. On World Suicide Prevention Day (10th September), 2012, WHO claimed that Indian Union Health Ministry estimates that 1.8 lakh people commit suicide every year in India. Also over 4 lakh people attempt suicides.15 suicides take place every hour in India. India alone contributes to more than 10% suicides in the world. South India is the world’s suicide capital. The suicide rate in India has been increasing steadily and has reached 11.2 (per 100,000 of population) in 2011 registering 78% increase over the value of 1980 (6.3).According to the data available in National Crime Records Bureau (NCRB) report for the year 2011, the suicide rate in West Bengal is 18.1 people per 1-lakh whereas our national suicide rate is 11 people per 1-lakh. That report also shows that Puducherry has the highest rate of suicide, i.e., 44.8 people per 1lakh and in Lakshadweep the rate of suicide is 0.0 people per 1-lakh. One more surprising fact is that more than half of those who committed suicide were between 20 and 45, their most productive years. Males die much more often by means of suicide than do females, although females attempt suicide more often. The overall male: female ratio of suicide victims for the year 2009 was 65:35. People die by suicide more often during spring and summer. According to data released by National Crime Records Bureau (NCRB), on an average around 15 persons committed suicide every hour across our country in 2014. As many as 1.31 lakh persons committed suicide across the country last year, with Maharashtra having the highest number of cases in any state. Among major cities, Chennai topped the list. NCRB data also revealed that 69.7 per cent of those who ended their lives by committing suicide earned an annual
www.ijmer.in
196
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
income of less than Rs 1 lakh, and that one out of every six suicides was committed by a housewife. Maharashtra had 16,307 suicide cases in 2014, followed by 16,122 cases in Tamil Nadu and 14,310 cases in West Bengal. They accounted for 12.4 per cent, 12.2 per cent and 10.9 per cent respectively of suicide cases across the country, as per NCRB data. The all-India rate of suicides was 10.6 in 2014. Puducherry reported the highest rate of suicide (40.4) followed by Sikkim (38.4), Andaman and Nicobar Islands (28.9), Telangana (26.5), Kerala (23.9) and Tamil Nadu (23.4). The suicide rate in cities (12.8) was higher as compared to allIndia suicide rate (10.6). Data also shows that and the overall male-tofemale ratio for suicides during the 2014 was 68:32. National suicide rates, apparently universally, show a long-term upward trend. Worldwide suicide rates have increased by 60% in the past 50 years, mainly in the developing countries. Most suicides in the world occur in Asia, which is estimated to account for up to 60% of all suicides. According to the World Health Organization, China, India, and Japan may account for 40% of all world suicides.
www.ijmer.in
197
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
A recent WHO report revealed that in number of suicides, India accounts for nearly a third of the global total and more than twice as many in China, which is second on the list. In countries where firearms are readily available, many suicides involve the use of firearms. Over 52% of suicides that occurred in the United States in 2005 were by firearms. Asphyxiation methods (including hanging) and toxification (poisoning and overdose) are fairly common as well. Together they comprised about 40% of suicides in the United States during the same time period. Other methods of suicide include blunt force trauma (jumping from a building or bridge, self-defenestrating, stepping in front of a train, or car collision, for example). Exsanguinations or bloodletting (slitting one’s wrist or throat), intentional drowning, selfimmolation, electrocution, intentional radiation intentional starvation are other suicide methods.
poisoning
and
Common philosophical opinion of suicide since modernization reflected a spread in cultural beliefs of western societies that suicide is immoral and unethical. The arguments which can be raised against suicide are as follows: ▼ The first argument against suicide is divine argument. It is said that human life is a divine gift. God has sent us on earth. Who are we to take it away? According to Plato, humans are possessions of the gods. It is wrong to destroy someone else’s possessions. Therefore suicide is wrong. ▼ The second argument against suicide states that life is intrinsically valuable because we enjoy life whatever it is. We have a natural inclination to live. If we commit suicide, i.e., destroy life then a value is destroyed by it which is not morally permissible. ▼ The third argument against suicide is that nobody can claim that he is in the worst suffering position in the world. If we broaden our
www.ijmer.in
198
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
experience we find that there is at least one who is in worse situation than me. Then why should we escape from life? ▼ The fourth argument against suicide is given by classical liberalist philosopher J. S. Mill. Mill was a supporter of utilitarianism. Utility, or the Greatest Happiness Principle, holds that actions are right in proportion as they tend to promote happiness, wrong as they tend to produce the reverse of happiness. Mill said that liberty is the power of the individual to make choices, and choice that would deprive one of the ability of making further choices should be prevented. Thus, for Mill, selling oneself into slavery or killing oneself should be prevented in order to avoid precluding the ability to make further choices. Mill believes the individual to be the best guardian of their own interests. ▼ The fifth argument against suicide is given by Immanuel Kant (1724 – 1804), the father of deontologism. For Kant, the intention to kill oneself constitutes suicide. According to him, the act of suicide cannot be consistent with the idea of humanity as an end in itself. He also states that we should always act depending only on that maxim or rule that can be regarded as a universal law. The act of destroying life cannot be universally applicable. So suicide is unethical. Kant's main argument against suicide is that people are entrusted with their lives, which have a uniquely inherent value. By killing oneself, a person dispenses with his humanity and makes himself into a thing to be treated like a beast. Kant also argues on more consequentialist grounds that if a person is capable of suicide, then he is capable of any crime. According to him, suicide is in no circumstances permissible. The man who commits suicide sinks lower than the beasts. ▼The sixth argument against suicide is Suicide is selfish: it causes much pain to those left behind. They may blame themselves. It is harder to get over the death of a suicide, than someone killed in an accident. Unless one is absolutely disconnected from the rest of the
www.ijmer.in
199
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
world, his or her suicide would cause much distress, pain and inconvenience among other people. There are arguments in favour of allowing an individual to choose between life and suicide. Those in favour of suicide as a personal choice reject the thought that suicide is always or usually irrational. The counter-arguments in favour of suicide are as follows: ▲ Firstly, human beings are autonomous at least as to the decision of life and death. Nobody can object me if I freely choose to die. The right to life includes the right to die. As a human being I should have the right to determine at what time, in what way I shall die and only I should be the person who will take the last decision about my life. If it is said that my death will cause distress to others, that is not my business to look after. Neither I am an object, nor am I made for others only. ▲ Secondly, if a person is continuously suffering from an intolerable and incurable pain he should have the free choice to kill himself. If he is fully disturbed mentally as well as physically, suicide is not only permissible, but also desirable in such a terrible situation. Life is not seemed to have any intrinsic value here, but instrumental value. ▲ Thirdly, if an action promotes the best interest of everyone concerned and violates no one’s rights then that action is morally acceptable. Liberalism asserts that a person’s life belongs only to him/her, and no other persons have the right to force their own ideals that life must be lived. ▲ Fourthly, the opponents of religious view claims that if it is said that God is the controller of human beings then we can justifiably say that God has settled all things including suicide. When it is said that we are God’s property, it is said metaphorically because this view is in tension with the notion of human dignity. Moreover, does a benevolent God really want to preserve life at all costs, even if one is suffering horribly? www.ijmer.in
200
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
▲ Fifthly, David Hume (1711-1776) gives one of the most famous philosophical defenses of suicide in his essay "Of Suicide." Supporting suicide David Hume said that all causes in life are a result of the guidance and direction of God, nothing in nature happens without his approval and coexistence with the cause. It follows that suicide could not occur without his consent. So suicide is not a transgression of duty towards God. He adds that suicide is no transgression of duty towards society because in retiring from life, one at most stops doing good, which, if it is a harm, is a small one. Moreover suicide is no transgression of duty to myself as age, misfortune, sickness can make life worse than death. The bulk of Hume’s argument focuses on whether suicide violates duties to God. We can reconstruct Hume's main argument against such a duty as follows:
There is a self-rule established by God in two forces of nature (i.e., physical laws of the natural world, and purposeful action of the animal world)
As a rule, God has given humans the liberty to alter nature for their own happiness
Suicide is an instance of altering the course of nature for our own happiness
There is no good reason this instance should be an exception to the rule
Therefore, suicide does not violate God's plan. At the end of the discussion, the most relevant question arises:
is suicide justified at all? Here I want to mention that applied ethics is very much situational or contextual. A maxim or rule, for being moral, depends to a large extent upon the situation on which it is placed. Situational ethics states that decision making should be based upon the circumstances of a particular situation, and not upon any fixed Law. www.ijmer.in
201
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Suicide, being a subset of applied ethics, has context-sensitivity. I think, it is not possible to make general rules that suicide is justified in this situation, or not justified in that situation, or like that. We can never foresee a concrete situation. Until and unless I am in a situation in which suicide seems to be placed, I can’t tell whether I should accept it or not. So the last word (of the justifiability of suicide) would be said by the situation or circumstance. References: 1. Hume, David (1986). Of Suicide. In Peter Singer (Ed.), Applied Ethics. New York: Oxford University Press. 2. Nuttall, Jon (1993). Moral Questions: An Introduction to Ethics. U.K.: Polity Press. 3. Sengupta, P. B., Ghosh, S. and Ghosh, P. K. (2006). Neetishastra O Dharmadarshan. Kolkata: Banerjee Publishers. 4. Singer, Peter (1986). Practical Ethics. London & New York: Cambridge University Press. 5. The Times of India, September 11, 2012 6. http://www.who.int/mental_health/ prevention/suicide/suicideprevent/en/ 7. http://www.merriam-webster.com/dictionary/suicide 8. U.S. Suicide Statistics (2005), suicide.org Retrieved on 2008-0324 9. Fleischmann, Alexander (2008). WHO Statement: World Suicide Prevention Day 2008 (PDF). World Health Organization (2008). Retrieved on 2008-10-26 10. The Times of India, September 04, 2014 11.http://ncrb.nic.in/CD_ADSI_2012/suicides 12.The Times of India, July 03, 2014 13.http://ncrb.gov.in/adsi2013/suicides%202013.pdf
www.ijmer.in
202
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
RACISM AND DREADFUL VIOLENCE IN PAUL SCOTT’S THE JEWEL IN THE CROWN
Ms. S. Rajeswari Associate Professor M.L.R Institute of Technology Hyderabad
Dr.G.Chenna Reddy Assistant Professor Department of English Acharya Nagarjuna University Guntur Dist., A.P.
INTRODUCTION: Paul Scott’s life and literary work were shaped by his experience of British India. Scott set out ten years to write four novels on the British in India and chose to confine reference to the Second World War. Scott has gone on employing skill as a creative writer of great talent. Paul Scott’s Raj Quartet – comprising The Jewel in the Crown, The Day of the Scorpion, The Towers of Silence and A Division of the Spoils– represents an important disruption of comfortable script. It charts the demise of the British in India by examining representative figures and communities in the crucial years between Gandhi’s Quit India movement in 1942 and partition in 1947. Scott imaginatively interprets the Raj in the accurately framed historical period 1942-47. The first novel of The Raj Quartet, The Jewel in the Crown is set in the fictional town, Mayapore. The English constantly repeated their mistakes over centuries. This was the case in colonial India. Scott uses the visual techniques of the cinema in an attempt to unravel the complexities of the novels. Scott also narrated a picturesque view of socio-political and economic condition of India prevailing during the British Raj especially at the time of partition. The novel welcomes the reader to India and presents the beautiful country where everything can be bought in its markets.
www.ijmer.in
203
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
RACISM: Racism consists of ideologies and practices that seek unequal distribution of privileges and rights. It refers to the separation of people through a process of social division. Scott’s racial discrimination is seen in throughout his writings. British supremacy asserts upon a profound mixture of dichotomous beliefs held by both natives and Englishmen alike in India as well as Britain. Empowering their oppressors the natives were complicit in their own subjugation. Believing in equal measure in civilizing the natives they exploited them. Accepting their own inferiority the natives in turn embraced the civilizing ethos of the British. The ebb and flow of British supremacy and native subordination waxed and waned in equal measure for over a century of the Raj’s rule. ENGLISH GIRL-DAPHNE MANNERS: The Jewel in the Crown is about an English girl, Daphne Manners who falls in love with an Anglicized Indian called Hari Kumar. In the opening stages of the Indian rebellion of 1942, Miss Manners is criminally assaulted by a gang of hooligans. The district superintendent of police, Ronald Merrick, promptly arrests Hari Kumar and five other boys of a similar type whom he finds drinking illicit liquor in a hut not far from the scene of the crime. Scott’s prose style concentrates on people’s thoughts and stays there until the author is ready to move on. The prose does not cut away abruptly but hobble on the characters. The Jewel in the Crown, frame a picture of an Indian landscape which has survived and will survive all invasions and rapes. Here the tragedy of Daphne Manners is linked to all connotations derived from the word ‘Bibighar’, the place of women. The place witnessed atrocities by English and Indians at Cawnpore in 1857. It was burned down by Scottish trader Macgregor, who was jealous of the Indian lover. Scott’s www.ijmer.in
204
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
towns and characters are imaginary, but the land and many of the events are not, for they all connect. Even the names of places are connected. John Atkins states that “The assumptions of linear narrative–the basic design of British fictions of India–are challenged as the story shuttles between its twin contexts, and orbits the Bibighar incident which the historian senses is the key to understanding wider events (p.72). Many characters among the British and Indian communities play important roles in the novel, set in the closing years of the British rule in India. The reader meets Miss Crane, a mission teacher and later gets acquainted with Miss Daphne Manners, an English girl who falls in love with Hari Kumar. Hari Kumar is an young Indian who has lived in England before he is forced by circumstances to return back to his birthplace, India. As an antagonist can serve Mr. Merrick, Superintendent of the Police, who wants to get engaged with Miss Manners and finds a rival in Kumar. Patrick Swinden rightly points that “This is a story of a rape, of events that led up to it and followed it and of the place in which it happened. There are the action, the people and the place; all of which are interrelated but in their totality incommunicable in isolation from the moral continuum of the human affairs (p.98). BASIC PLOT: Many characters like Sister Ludmila, Dr. Anna Klaus, Rajput princess Lilly Chatterjee, the Deputy Commissioner Mr. White and his wife, who has been in Mayapore only four years, since 1938, the Assistant Commisioner Mr. Poulson, who has come to Mayapore shortly afterwards and who is a friend of the Whites and Brigadier Reid, commander of the British troops, who wants to avoid the civil unrest by moving the Berkshires into Mayapore. The basic plot is formed by the interracial love affair between Daphne and Hari, which is ended by the rape of Daphne Manners in the Bibighar Gardens during the raids of August 1942 in Mayapore. The revolt is provoked www.ijmer.in
205
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
by Gandhi‘s imprisonment and it is a part of the “Quit India” campaign. The young Indian Hari Kumar is accused of the rape and arrested by the District Superintendent of Police – Ronald Merrick who intended to marry Daphne before she started to date an Indian. ENGLISH TEACHER- EDWINA CRANE: The two female protagonists Daphne Manners and Edwina Crane have charitable jobs. Daphne Manners works in a hospital and Edwina Crane teaches Indian children in a missionary school. They are idealistic in the relationships and almost in their relationship to India. The main difference between them is their social status and upbringing. Daphne was born in India in a rich and reputable British family. She used to live in luxury of the top society unlike Edwina, who comes from the poor family. They dislike the problems that emerge in colonial India, but they love the image of the country that they have created in their minds. As a child Edwina lived with her father, who was a drunkard and whom she had to take care. Later she engages as a child-care worker in India experiences a bad treatment by the family she works in. Yet she stands above their Indian servants. The narrator offers a creative process in the form of the novel. Daphne and Edwina have the plentiful social lives. Daphne‘s aunt Lili arranges parties in Mac Gregor house where the British meet the Indians and Daphne herself visits the British club in Mayapore where the British young people meet. Edwina gives parties for British soldiers and tea-parties in her house for Indian women. That proves that they meet Indians regularly, but both of them feel inner pride for being British. “It is their feeling of their own authority and superiority that destroy them both in the end. They are basically good but they are trapped within the ideology of the period of the British Empire. They perceive the Indians as a subordinate race feeling that they need some help from their backwardness”(Alena Michálková, p.37). Miss Crane
www.ijmer.in
206
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
and Miss Manners die because of Indian men. They consider themselves right which expresses their subconscious superiority and arrogance. Both women commit suicide. Miss Manners dies during the childbirth. She could undergo a surgery, but she refuses. Her death may be classified as suicide. Her daughter with mixed blood represents a new hope - the hope that the Indian and the British can coexist as two equal elements. TRANSCENDING THE RACIAL BARRIER: Lord Ripon and Lord Curzon were appointed as the viceroys of India. White racism played a functional and necessary role in the political and economic structure of colonial India. Contemporary Indian journals or private papers used to reveal such issues immediately. These were the important issues for the rise of nationalism. Edwina’s and Daphne’s characters represent British women who volunteer to live in India. Seeking for adventure and oriental beauty, with their heads full of ideals, they experienced disillusion, dirt, poverty, ordinariness, social disorder and conflict. The women gradually get used to live in the white part of society unconsciously adopting the idea of the white superiority. They like India and its people but not really care to the real situation. Daphne Manners is seen to be having the moral courage of transcending the racial barrier and falling in love with an Indian, Hari Kumar. She carries within her probably Hari Kumar’s child and dies in giving birth to it. At the climatic point she is criminally assaulted by a group of men, who were Indian ruffians. Daphne suffers physical assault and moral humiliation. When Daphne dies in giving birth to Parvati, she attains the stature of a heroin of Anglo-Indian relationship. Parvati is the chance for the new order, new rules and relations between the British and the Indians. The contrast can be found in the fact that she is being brought up by Lili Chatterjee who represents the old culture and www.ijmer.in
207
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
traditions. Such opinions illuminate Paul Scott’s attitude to British imperialism in India. The British women do not see the complexity of the problem. They really try to moderate the conflict between the two nations, though their endeavour does not always come to any good. Men, on the other hand, involve themselves in politics and military and they are responsible for provoking the conflicts. The primary object of British rule was to protect and enhance the interests of Britian in India. India was the great testing ground for colonial rule. Racial superiority does not allow Merrick to have rational attitude towards Hari Kumar. Hari Kumar can speak better English than Merrick and behave as an English boy when he was taken to police station. Merrick looks at Hari Kumar with a jealous eye because Hari Kumar belongs to an inferior race.Paul Scott thus illustrates “The changing attitude of the British towards the people they ruled: The great days of the Empire had been when they were leading the natives towards the light of civilization. It became distinctly unbearable when the light actually came within the range of vision” (p.1). Merrick is unbearable that Hari Kumar has reached the ideal of civilization. He tortures Hari Kumar as his way of imposing his racial superiority. The sequence of events, which delineate the relation between Daphne Manners and Hari Kumar, is an effective means adopted by Paul Scott to portray the race relationship between Indiana and the British. Men are the wrong-doers while women are the victims. It is possible to discover the author’s slightly pro-feminist tendencies. The author deviated from history and exposed the relationship with India based on violation. The idea of different races seized Scott’s imagination. The author’s imperialistic tradition in literature in keeping with the preoccupation with the British Empire is emphasized.
www.ijmer.in
208
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
DREADFUL VIOLENCE: Paul Scott narrates the tensions and conflicts resulting from the enforced recognition like the relationship between Daphne and the young Indian Hari Kumar and public reaction to it. Daphne is attracted to an outsider, Hari Kumar. His anglicized background has alienated him unacceptable to the British community. In fact Hari Kumar is an extreme example which dominates a great deal of post colonial fiction. By refusing to keep within the designated boundaries of the group, Hari and Daphne undermine the inherent power of social taboos to keep communities apart and distinct. Therefore, the outsider is seen as a threat to the cohesiveness of the group who wish to present a united front. Daphne Manners is raped by a gang of Indian ruffians after they have watched Hari and Daphne making love in the Bibighar Gardens. The threat to the British community materializes when Hari Kumar promises Daphne that he would be silent about the whole affair. Later he is arrested as one of the suspects in the case of rape and imprisoned by Ronald Merrick and Daphne dies, giving birth to a female child, Parvati. As the image of rape or what appears to be rape, its recurrence underlines the importance of its connotations in relation to Britian’s idea of itself in India. The horror of this incident is intensified by the fact that, as The Raj Quartet points out, the British government likes to present itself in the personification of a caring, material figure. The horror of rape operates on several psychological levels. Udayon Misra in The Raj in Fiction mentions that “The British point-of-view is seen an Indian violation of the British community’s benign image of itself. White condemnation of what becomes known as the Bibighar incident is essentially racist in nature and seen as a justification of British prejudice (p.15). At times Paul Scott’s attitude to British rule in India is
www.ijmer.in
209
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
finding difficult to maintain the glitter of the star of India. Daphne Manners exposes the British mode of imparting justice is seen to be rooted in the illusion of the moral superiority of the Englishmen. HISTORICAL EVENTS: Scott incorporates many historical events in the novel. He describes the revolt in Amritsar in great detail. On 10th April 1919 the British officers ordered two popular leaders out from Amritsar, which provoked the protest strikes. British General Dyer decided to deal with no mercy with the participants of the riots. In the square Jallianwallah Bagh in Amritsar, which was the very centre of the revolt, died about two thousands of innocent civilians including women and children. The Mayapore riots are compared to the Amritsar massacre. While the Indians describe the events that happened in Amritsar as an act of an insane maniac who started to fire into the defenseless crowd, the British, the servicemen of the army, in particular, admire the General and understand the action as a necessity. Rumours of their torture and defilement add fuel to the fire of the riots that bring the Indian population and the British raj into a violent confrontation. These riots are widespread throughout the country. Their cause is political. At the onset of some earlier troubles, in the Punjab, Miss. Crane, a Mission School Superintendent, was dragged off her bicycle by a gang of hooligans, and beaten up. Six men were arrested at random. The lane in which the assault took place was sealed off by orders of one Brigadier-General Dyer, a triangle was erected in the lane and the six men who had been arrested were brought there from jail, and whipped, for what was called an infringement of prison regulations. Any Indian who lived in the lane was made to crawl on his hands and knees along it to get to his front door. There occurred the affair of the shooting by the Gurkha troops, led by General Dyer, of a crowd of unarmed Indian civilians in an www.ijmer.in
210
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
enclosed space called the Jallianwallah Bagh. The crowd had collected there in defiance of Dyer's orders prohibiting public meetings. They were not even warned to disperse but simply fired on. The troops blocked the only exit. Women and children were among those killed. There was no way out. The novelist’s artful triumph has never been forgotten. The British took repressive measures where Indians saw crude ruse and prohibited free speech, alienated Gandhi, the Congress Party. At the time, the British in India hailed General Reginald Dyer as a saviour, a man who had nipped the revolution in the bud with a military version of gun-boat diplomacy. The worst was the firing of 1600 rounds by troops on about 20,000 unarmed people at Jalianwallah Bagh in Amritsar. The firing stopped only after the ammunition had run out by then there were about three hundred and seventy-nine dead and over twelve hundred wounded. After eight months the news reached London. A sizeable group in the House of Commons and an actual majority in the House of Lords appreciated Dyer’s actions. Dyer was eventually had upon the carpet and was ill from the disease of brain which later killed him. The memsahib’s of India collected L26, 000 to help keep the wolf from the old general’s door. Edward Grierson quoted that “Gandhi said: Experience has made me wiser, I consider the existing system of government to the wholly bad and requiring special national effort to end it or mend it”(p.204). The story illustrates the fact that human action is subject to the pressures exerted by the collective conscience. It is this collective conscience that gives history its forward impetus. All these things formulate the fictional images of the writer's experience, imagination, knowledge and creative impulse. After the invasion of the Japanese to Burma, the war proceeded to the Indian frontiers. The defeat of the British army in
www.ijmer.in
211
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
Burma degraded the colonial administration to protect the country. Political tensions strengthened and Gandhi formulated the slogan: ‘Quit India,’ which expressed the demand of the independence for th
India. On 7
August 1942 the Congress decided to begin a new th
campaign of the non-cooperation. On 9
August Gandhi and the
leaders of the Congress were arrested. That provoked mass riots against the British. These rumors became the central theme of Scott’s novel. “In The Jewel in the Crown many times the revolt is analysed from the military point of view. The divisions of the young Indians attacked police stations, post offices and railway stations and bridges were blown up. The British officers punished all the participants severely. The mass struggle spread through the country while the economic situation worsened because of the poor crop of 1943 and 1944. The author rewrote the history. The end of the British Empire is one of the most important socio-politic incidents searching for new national and individual identities. The imperial novel has a long tradition in British literature. Fall of the Empire is the significant theme of the British literature. Paul Scott considerably devotes himself to individual historical events in connection with the Indian struggle for independence. He focuses mainly on the events of the World War II. The facts are presented subjectively. As dehistorisisation occurred by the writer, the reader can deduce the historical truth. CONCLUSION: Paul Scott explores powerful themes of racism and dreadful violence in a complex environment through the story The Jewel in the Crown, the first in his master piece series The Raj Quartet. The details come through interviews with some of the characters, letters of the characters to each other, from the memories of Brig. Reid, a brief account of the events by Mr. Robin White, and a www.ijmer.in
212
INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL OF MULTIDISCIPLINARY EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH ISSN : 2277-7881; IMPACT FACTOR – 3.318; IC VALUE:5.16; ISI VALUE:2.286 VOLUME 4, ISSUE 9(1), SEPTEMBER 2015
journal addressed by Daphne Manners to her aunt, Lady Manners. The main plot of the novel, The Jewel in the Crown, is set in two locations in the fictional town of Mayapore-the MacGregor House and the Bibighar covering the events that happen during the riots in Mayapore of 1942, of which the most touching is the rape of the British girl Daphne Manners and the attack on the missionary teacher, Miss Edwina Crane. The author connects the fact with the fiction by describing and analysing the riots, the historical and political scene that is factual. The jewel represents India and the scene as depicted never actually happened. By dehistorisising literature Paul Scott created the imaginary dramatic situations of the criminal assault, the arrests and the treatment of the prisoners at the same time. Paul Scott tries to identify the moral value of colonization and use the image of the violent rape as the parallel to the British conquest of India. After the horrific events happen during the civil disturbance, the missionary teacher, Miss Crane takes the picture called “Jewel in Her Crown” down the wall of her room. References:
1. Alena Michálková, British and Indian Identities and Clashes in
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Paul Scott’s the Jewel in the Crown, Bachelor Major Thesis, Masaryk University Faculty of Arts, Department of English and American studies, 2007. Edward Grierson in The Imperial Dream: The British Commonwealth and Empire 1775-1969, Collins, 1972. John Atkins, George Orwell: A Literary Study, London, 1954. Patrick Swinden, Paul Scott (Writers & Their Work), Northcote House Publishers Ltd, February, 1983. Paul Scott, The Jewel In The Crown, Arrow Books, 2005. Udayon Misra, The Raj in Fiction, B.R.Pub.Corp., 1987.
www.ijmer.in
213
